JP6503403B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention performs a variable display, relates to a gaming machine of pachinko machines and the like that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state for the player.

  As a game machine, when a game ball is shot by a launch device into a game area by a launch device and the game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize port provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as "variation") of identification information is provided, and a predetermined game value is obtained when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result. Are configured to provide the player with

  The game value is the right to the special variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine to be in an advantageous state for the player who is easy to hit the ball, or to be in the advantageous state for the player. It is to be generated or to be in a state where it becomes easy to establish the condition of the prize ball payout.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, when the specific display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state). In addition, derivation | leading-out display is making the identification information (pattern) stop display finally. In the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device (big winning opening) is opened a predetermined number of times, and the gaming ball is in a state of being easy to win. Then, in each open period, when there is a winning to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings, the large winning openings are closed. Hereinafter, the open period of each big winning opening may be called a round.

  In such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is a high probability time short state, it is controlled to a special effect state (special sound mode), and a special effect similar to the special effect state (special sound even in the normal state (special sound There is one configured to be able to execute the same audio aspect as the aspect (see Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the special effect is executed in the normal state, the high probability time reduction state is made at a higher rate than when the special effect is not executed, and the special effect state is controlled. .

JP, 2013-34607, A (paragraph 1129-1130)

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 may not be able to sufficiently improve the interest in the game.

The present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the Yu technique.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and storing information on the variable display as hold storage. Possible holding storage means, holding display means for displaying a holding display corresponding to the holding storage stored in the holding storage means, and determination means for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state (for example, game control micro A portion that executes step S61 in the computer 560) and a determination portion that determines whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state before the determination of the determination portion (for example, steps S220 and S222 in the game control microcomputer 560 are executed) Part), the display mode of the suspension display includes a normal mode, a special mode, and a special mode, and according to the determination result of the determination means, It further comprises an effect execution means capable of executing a suspension notice effect for displaying the delay indication in a special mode, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold indication changes. It is possible to execute a first indication effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes after the effect and a second indication effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change after the effect, and when the hold display is displayed in a special mode And when it is not displayed in the special mode, the suggestion effect can be executed, and when the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the second suggestion is performed more frequently than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. According to the determination result of the determination means, the effect is further provided, and the advance effect execution means capable of executing the advance effect is further provided, and the advance effect execution means controls the variable display as the determination target to an advantageous state Whether or depending on the type of advantageous conditions to be controlled, characterized in that it is capable of executing the prediction effect at different rates. Such a configuration can improve the interest in the game.
(Means 1) Another game machine according to the present invention performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol) that can be identified, and variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result A specific gaming state (for example, advantageous for the player when the specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) defined in advance is derived and displayed on (for example, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) , A gaming machine that controls to a big hit gaming state), and the special effect state (for example, high probability / for example / high base / high base state) corresponding to the special gaming state (for example, high probability / high base state) advantageous to the player after the specific gaming state is over Effect state control means (for example, effect control image control means for controlling to any of the effect states among a plurality of effect states including the state of displaying a background screen of display color (for example, red) according to the high base state Whether the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed in the part where the step S640, S643, S646, S649 is executed in the computer 100 In the special effect state based on the determination result of the prior determination means (for example, the portion performing step S220 and S222 in the gaming control microcomputer 560, the portion performing step S61) and the determination result of the prior determination means Special effect execution means capable of executing special effects (for example, advance notice effect, background effect) in the same manner as the special effect state when not being controlled (for example, when controlled to low probability / low base state) (For example, steps S8005 to S8008, S in the effect control microcomputer 100 And the effect state control means is in the specific game state without the special effect being executed when the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means and the special effect is controlled to the specific game state. The special effect state is controlled at a high rate as compared to the case where it is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. The special effect executing means executes the special effect executing the first period (for example, 1 fluctuation or 2 fluctuation) and the second period (for example, 1) which is longer than the first period. There are times when 2 fluctuations longer than fluctuations, 3 fluctuations longer than 2 fluctuations) are performed, and the special display results are derived and displayed when the special effect is performed for the first period and when the second period is performed. Rate is different (For example, as shown in FIG. 55, when the probability change big hit or the normal big hit, as the number of the first pending storage increases as compared to the case of the loss) As the number increases), the execution rate of pre-reading notice effect is high. In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, the execution ratio of the background effect is the same as the execution ratio of the previewed advance effect of one execution. ) Is characterized. With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the special presentation period, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 2) In means 1, the special effect execution means performs special effects (for example, advance notice effect) in the variable display of the identification information before the variable display of the identification information as the determination target by the prior determination means is started. If it is determined that it is determined that the specific display result is obtained by the preliminary determination means (for example, the portion performing the steps S8005 to S8008 in the effect control microcomputer 100), the preliminary determination means determines that the specific display result is not obtained. The special effect is executed for a long period of time as compared to the case (for example, as shown in FIG. 55, in the case of a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit, the first number of pending storages is As the number increases (that is, as the number of executions of the preview advance notice effect increases), the execution rate of the advance notice effect is higher. It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation can be improved as the effect period of the special effect becomes longer, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

(Means 3) Reach effect executing means for executing reach effect in means 1 or 2 (for example, according to the process table selected in steps S8030 and S8034 according to the setting in step S8027 in microcomputer 100 for effect control, step S8036, S851 is provided, and the reach effect execution means can execute the specific reach effect (for example, the reach effect of the specific reach aspect) when being controlled to the special effect state, and the special effect is executed. It is possible to execute the same reach effect as the specific reach effect while playing (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S6505 when Y is one of steps S6502 to S6504 to set the specific reach mode). Configured to configure) Good. According to such a configuration, the special effect and the reach effect can be associated, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

(Means 4) In any of the means 1 to 3, the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area is a game medium (for example, game ball) The start condition is satisfied after the passage of (for example, when the number of stored memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and the big hit game is executed A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the variable display of effect symbols) on the basis of having not been), and when a game medium passes through the start area Numerical data extraction means for extracting numerical data (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1215 and S1227) and a game medium passes through the start area With respect to variable display of identification information whose start condition has not yet been satisfied, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). Hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as a second hold storage, and a hold display means (for example, for displaying a hold storage stored in the hold storage means as a hold display) , And the display mode of the suspension display is the normal mode ("o" in the second embodiment: see FIG. 72A) and the normal mode. A special embodiment (six lines are drawn on the outside of “o” in the second embodiment; see FIG. 73 (B)) which is an embodiment different from the embodiment, the normal embodiment and the special embodiment, and Is a different aspect 1 Special mode ("x" in the second embodiment includes "x": see FIG. 72 (B1)) and second special mode ("o" in the second embodiment) (See FIG. 72 (B2)), and the pending display corresponding to the pending storage determined by the prior determination means at a different ratio according to the determination result of the prior determination means (1) Hold notice effect executing means capable of executing hold notice effect (for example, pre-read effect) to be displayed in the special mode or the second special mode (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control in the second embodiment performs steps S67106 and S67114 , S 1813, etc. Further provided with FIG. 67 (B), the pending announcement effect executing means has a plurality of timings (for example, timing of start winning, arbitrary shift timing, etc. Suggest that it is possible to change and display the hold indication in the first special mode or the second special mode at any timing, etc.), and to execute the suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the display mode of the hold indication changes. The effect execution means (for example, a portion where the microcomputer for effect control 100 in the second embodiment executes steps S671110, S67115, S1806, S1813, etc.) is further provided, and the suggestion effect execution means has a special mode for the hold display. When displayed, the suggestion effect is executed at a higher frequency than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode (for example, a portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S1806 and the like). It may be configured as shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so diversity in timing to change the display mode of the hold display In addition to being able to be held, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestive effect is executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to 4, the start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area is a game medium (for example, game ball) The start condition is satisfied after the passage of (for example, when the number of stored memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed, and the big hit game is executed A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information (for example, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the variable display of effect symbols) on the basis of having not been), and when a game medium passes through the start area Numerical data extraction means for extracting numerical data (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1215 and S1227) and a game medium passes through the start area With respect to variable display of identification information whose start condition has not yet been satisfied, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). Hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as a second hold storage, and a hold display means (for example, for displaying a hold storage stored in the hold storage means as a hold display) , And the display mode of the suspension display is the normal mode ("o" in the second embodiment: see FIG. 72A) and the normal mode. A special embodiment (six lines are drawn on the outside of “o” in the second embodiment; see FIG. 73 (B)) which is an embodiment different from the embodiment, the normal embodiment and the special embodiment, and Is a different aspect 1 Special mode ("x" in the second embodiment includes "x": see FIG. 72 (B1)) and second special mode ("o" in the second embodiment) (See FIG. 72 (B2)), and the pending display corresponding to the pending storage determined by the prior determination means at a different ratio according to the determination result of the prior determination means (1) Hold notice effect executing means capable of executing hold notice effect (for example, pre-read effect) to be displayed in the special mode or the second special mode (for example, the microcomputer 100 for effect control in the second embodiment performs steps S67106 and S67114 , And S1813, etc. A plurality of types of on-hold notice effect patterns are provided as effect patterns on on-hold notice effects, and a plurality of on-hold notice effect execution means are provided. It is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing (for example, the timing of the start winning, any shift timing, any other timing, etc.), and the pre-determination means When it is determined that the specific display result is obtained, the pending display corresponding to the pending storage determined by the preliminary determination means is higher at a higher rate than when the preliminary determination means determines that the specific display result is not obtained. A portion displayed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the second embodiment performs step S67106 and the like). 67 (B)), when performing a suspension notice effect with a suspension notice effect pattern (for example, a second look-ahead effect pattern) displayed by changing the suspension display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode, Hold indication is displayed at a higher rate than when a hold notice effect is performed with a hold notice effect pattern (for example, a first look-ahead effect pattern) displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without displaying the hold display in a special mode. May be displayed in a second special mode (for example, a portion where the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S67106 and S67107 etc. See FIG. 67 (B) and FIG. 68). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so diversity in timing to change the display mode of the hold display In addition to being able to have it, when the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the proportion displayed in the second special mode when the specific display result is high is increased, so the sense of expectation is enhanced. It is possible to improve the fun of the game.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a production control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows 4 ms timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the decorative symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern classification determination table for loss. It is an explanatory view showing a hit change pattern judging table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss change pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of a symbol specification command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a change category command. It is a flowchart which shows normal symbol process processing. It is an explanatory view showing a per symbol regular decision table. It is a flowchart which shows gate switch passage processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop time processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows at the time of winning a prize judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during special symbol change. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing which CPU for production control performs. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production | presentation control uses. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution area of a predetermined | prescribed effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a predetermined effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a predetermined effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a predetermined effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example in the case of performing the predetermined | prescribed presentation which alert | reports the alerting | reporting result of a loss before alerting | reporting that reach | attainment production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined presentation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined presentation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st predetermined presentation process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st predetermined presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd predetermined presentation processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd predetermined presentation determination table. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-reading advance notice production decision table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows decoration design variation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows decoration design variation start processing. It is an explanatory view showing a background production determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop design of a decorative design. It is an explanatory view showing the example of composition of process data. It is a flow chart which shows reach production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during decoration design variation. It is a flowchart which shows decoration design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows decoration design fluctuation stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading production decision processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect execution decision table and a final display mode decision table in the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect pattern determination table in a 2nd embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a look-ahead effect change timing determination table in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows decoration design variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 1st pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading effect based on the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting opening switch passage process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of the start winning combination in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows decoration design change start processing in a 3rd embodiment.

Embodiment 1
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play frame is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (a game to be described later And the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface, for example. A stick controller 122 capable of tilting operation (back and forth and left and right) is attached.

  The player can perform a predetermined instruction operation, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper dish main body (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the member forming the bat supply tray (upper dish) 3 The push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 is configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 is provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, although the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower plates, the push button 120 and the push button 120 are maintained. The attachment position of the stick controller 122 may be either left or right in the upper and lower trays. Further, the positional relationship between the push button 120 and the attachment position of the stick controller 122 may be, for example, the positional relationship between left and right instead of the upper and lower.

  The trigger button 121 provided on the stick controller 122 is configured to allow an instruction operation by pushing and pulling the operation finger or the like while the player holds the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand. There is. The push button 120 is provided at a predetermined position of the glass door frame 2 which forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 122, and even when the player does not hold the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122, the pressing operation is performed by the operation hand It is configured to be able to perform an instruction operation by Therefore, compared to the push button 120, it is difficult for the trigger button 121 to perform a continuous hit operation as a continuous instruction operation.

  Further, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 for vibrating the stick controller 122. In this embodiment, for example, the center of gravity of the axis of the vibrator motor 126 is biased or a weight is attached to the axis, and vibration is generated by controlling the vibrator motor 126 by the effect control microcomputer 100 to generate a stick controller It is controlled to vibrate 122.

  On the right of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Also, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a) Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols).

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the kind of 1st special symbol and the kind of 2nd special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers of 0-9), kinds may differ. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are generically referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable indicator) There is something to do.

  In addition, although the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with two special symbol displays 8a and 8b, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state where the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the variable display time (variation time) passes, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area previously defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept including that the gaming ball is in the winning opening (winning) It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Further, near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of a decorative symbol. The decorative symbol display area includes, for example, symbol display areas for variably displaying decorative symbols for three decorations (for effect) such as "left", "middle" and "right". There are symbol display areas of “left”, “middle” and “right” in the symbol display area, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game .

  The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are approximately the same (or may be the same) and the periods of the variable display are substantially the same (or may be the same). In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a decorative symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, scale, shrink or deform in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are changed An effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called reach effect. In addition, reach state and the appearance are called reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes "off", and the variation display state is ended. A player plays while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9, but in the effect display device 9, for example, the effect using the character image, the big hit determination, and the determination of the variation pattern An effect of displaying a notification image based on the result is also performed.

  Also, when the shifted symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The combination of a predetermined decorative pattern which does not become reach may be stopped and displayed without the state being reach. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally out of position") when the variable display result is an out pattern.

  When the shifted symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display 9, the variable display state of the decorative symbols is started after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Reach effect is executed after reaching the reach state, and a combination of a predetermined decorative pattern that does not finally become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach out") when the variable display result is "off".

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. Finally, in the symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right" in the effect display device 9, the decorative symbols are aligned and stop-displayed.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start prize), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, the number of activated winning balls entering the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second holding memory number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) 4 A second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of one indicator is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, the first special symbol hold consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first reserved memory number A storage indicator 18a is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a first hold storage display unit 18c for displaying the first hold storage count and a second hold storage display unit 18d for displaying the second hold storage count are provided. ing. In addition, an area (summed pending storage display unit) may be provided to display the total number (total pending memory number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. As described above, by providing the combined hold storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display, for example, the numbers 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols). Also, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED etc. For example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "o" and "x") May be composed of

  On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is displayed an effect area 9F in which effects such as those suggesting the display results of normal symbols, effects of the display of special symbols, and effects such as the types of fluctuation patterns are performed.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a hit symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is hit and the symbol of the variable winning ball device 15 is a normal symbol, the player is placed in an advantageous state (a state where the game ball can win in the second start winning opening 14) Change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, whenever variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of the variation display of the special symbol is enhanced as compared with the normal probability state (probability change state in which the probability determined to be a big hit is high compared to the normal probability state). In the state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits and the symbol is increased is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, even in the short time state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened), which is not a definite change state but the symbol variation time is shortened, the opening time and the opening number of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the first number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The start condition of 2) is satisfied, and the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change big hit occurs, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is more likely to be start winning (ie, in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 It shifts to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that execution conditions of variable display are easily established. Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, it shifts to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, and the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is open is extended, as compared with the case where the high base is not used. It will be easier to get started.

  In addition, instead of extending the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), the transition to the normal symbol certainty state in which the probability of the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hitting is increased. It is possible to move to the high base state. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by performing transition control to the normal symbol certainty state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 hits will be increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if it shifts to the normal symbol certainty variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning prize ball device 15 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is enhanced when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or the stop symbol of a special symbol is a definite symbol, etc. Change to an advantageous state (start start winning state). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that includes changing from the closed state to the open state.

  In addition, the transition to the high base state may be made by transitioning to the normal symbol time short state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time short state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency at which the variation of the normal symbol starts is increased, and as a result, the frequency at which the normal symbol is hit is increased. Therefore, when the frequency with which the normal symbol is hit is high, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is high, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which start winning is easy.

  In addition, since the variation time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened by shifting to the short state when the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is shortened, the variation of the special symbol or the decorative symbol starts It is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence (in other words, the quickening of the reserve memory) and the occurrence of an invalid start winning. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  In addition, it is possible to start winning easily (transition to the high base state) by transitioning to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal pattern exact variation state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) May be In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high base (high base) (Transition to the state). In addition, it is easy to start winning by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time short state and special symbol time short state) (high It may be made to shift to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, part or all of which is created on the power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the game state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like on the basis of the data when the power failure or the like is restored after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all of the RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and start occurs at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning is at the time of reading out (extraction) of numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number.

  The random number circuit 503 has a selection setting function of updating range of numerical data (setting selection function of initial value and selection setting function of upper limit value), a selection setting function of updating rule of numerical data, and selection of update rule of numerical data It has various functions such as switching function. Such a function can improve the randomness of the generated random number.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (the ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560, a predetermined calculation) The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main substrate 31. . In addition, the main circuit board is also a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 for forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which variably displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which variably displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b, and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating the occurrence of the big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays the decorative pattern is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

  The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 100 including a effect control CPU 101 and a RAM for storing information on effects such as a decorative symbol process flag and the like. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( According to the effect control (INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 for controlling display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command to the VDP 109. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns), and background images. It is a ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to an instruction from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, diodes or transistors are used as unidirectional circuits. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 121 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the operation rod 122A of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. Do. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver substrate 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of sound effects or sounds in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of a decorative pattern).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is inputted becomes high level, and the microcomputer for gaming control 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the content of the program is valid, is performed, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, parity check is performed as data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply (steps S41 to S43). Process). Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. With the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output Port buffer), a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, both the backup flag and the check data are used to confirm whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the gaming state recovery process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number per judgment for normal symbols) is initialized to 0 by the RAM clear process, but it is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to In addition, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number per determination) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for performing selective processing according to the control state, such as a random symbol counter for determining a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. The value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub board (the board on which the microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). ) Is sent to the sub-substrate (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process of initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of random R, for example, by executing processing in accordance with the random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the type of variation pattern or a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is for generating the display random number. It is a process of updating the count value of the counter. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of the count value of a counter (normal pattern random number generation counter for determination per pattern) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol. It is a random number to decide. The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself Count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern in the process of transmitting a command signal to control another microcomputer, or to control other microcomputers, the count value of the random number for determination per normal pattern is 1 round When the value is advanced by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value, the initial value is set to the counter.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Subsequently, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the states of them are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage indicator 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, drive signals are output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol-performing determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag in accordance with the gaming state.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro-circuit mounted on the payout control board 37 according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to on / off of solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing of setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33).

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a decorative symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA-1 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach". The fluctuation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 The variation patterns of Super PA 3-1 to Super PA 3-2 and Super PB 3-1 to Super PB 3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, it is used when reaching and of the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream (the effect that temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols are executed during one variable display) Among them, when using the normal PB2-1, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, re-variation is to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol again after temporarily stopping the decorative symbol which is temporarily distracted from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3-Normal PB 2-4, Super PA 3-3-Super PA 3-4, Super PB 3-3-Super PB 3-4, Special PG 1-1-Special PG 1-3, Special PG 2-1-Special PG 2-2 fluctuation pattern Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG 1-1 to the special PG 1-3 and the variation pattern of the special PG 2-1 to the special PG 2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns accompanied by the pseudo-representation, which is used when the sudden variation is not a big hit or a small hit, when using the normal PB2-3, re-variation is performed once. Moreover, when using normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns which are used when reaching and are accompanied by effects of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, in the case of using the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used when reaching and that are accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, a re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 which is used in the case of the sudden big hit or small hit and which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo ream.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the fluctuation time is fixedly determined in accordance with the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo link, the fluctuation time is 32). Fixed at .75 seconds, and in the case of Super Reach A without pseudo run, the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds; The variation time may be made different depending on For example, even with the same type of super reach, as the total number of pending storages increases, the variation time may be shortened. In addition, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, in the case of performing variable display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the first number of pending storage, (2) In the case of performing variable display of a special symbol, the fluctuation time may be made different according to the second number of pending storages. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage number 0 to 2 and the pending storage number 3, 4 It is also possible to prepare a variation pattern type determination table for use), select the determination table according to the value of the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number, and make the variation time different.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot described later, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR 2): Determine the type (type) of variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR 3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR 4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR 5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and determines the variation using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) It is determined to be one of the variation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the features of the variation modes. For example, a plurality of change patterns are grouped by reach type, and a change pattern type including a change pattern with normal reach, a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach A, and a change pattern with super reach B It may be divided into the variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations in the pseudo sequence, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo sequence, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, and It may be divided into a variation pattern type including two variation patterns and a variation pattern type including three variation patterns. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped by the presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation or slip rendition.

  In this embodiment, as described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a normal reach, and a variation with a normal reach and a pseudo link It is classified into normal CA 3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a pattern, and super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type accompanied by super reach. Also, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA 4-1 which is a variation pattern type including non-reach variation pattern and special CA 4-2 which is a variation pattern type including variation pattern with reach. ing. Moreover, when it is a small hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of non-reach. Moreover, in the case of a loss, non-reach CA2-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns without reach or pseudo ream or slip rendition, and fluctuation patterns not accompanied by reach but pseudo ream or slip rendition Includes non-reach CA2-2 that is the variation pattern type that includes, non-reach CA2-3 that is the variation pattern type that includes the variation pattern of reduced variation that does not involve reach or pseudo reciprocation or slip rendition, and includes the variation pattern that includes only normal reach A variation pattern type including normal CA2-4 that is a variation pattern type, a normal CA2-5 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two reruns of pseudoruns, and a variation pattern with a normal reach and one rerun pseudorun. And normal CA2-6, which is a variation pattern type including, and variation pattern types with super reach Are the type divided into a certain super CA2-7.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number per normal symbol determination of (4) Perform count up (1 addition). That is, those are determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware (which may be hardware outside the gaming control microcomputer 560) built in the gaming control microcomputer 560 is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that software random numbers may be used instead of hardware random numbers as the jackpot determination random numbers.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time big hit determination table used in a normal probability state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state) and a positive change time big hit determination table used in a positive change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 8A in the positive change time jackpot determination table Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability change state is shifted to the high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be the big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also the high base state is transferred to the high probability state. There are two cases: transition to the probability state only and not transition to the high base state (low base state), but in any case, positive change state For the probability variation big hit decision table is used, otherwise the normal time big hit decision table is used.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a group of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In the small hit determination table, a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing variable display of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol (For the second special symbol) and there. Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), in FIG. 8C. Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hitting determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the gaming state is shifted to the positive changing state. Even if the game state is shifted to the definite change state, a small hit is generated, and if it is configured to perform an effect asking whether or not to be the positive change, the present game state is the definite change state, though Rather, it makes the player feel bothersome. Therefore, if small hits are not generated during the variable display of the second special symbol, small hits are less likely to be generated when the gaming state is a definite change state, and a turning effect for a definite change is not performed more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If any of the big hit judgment values are matched, it is decided to make it a big hit (normal big hit, positive variation big hit, sudden positive variation big hit which will be described later) for the special symbol. If the jackpot determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (percentage) of being a small hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a small hit is to decide whether to shift to a small hitting gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when using the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), it is determined to be a small hit at a ratio of 1/300. In the case where the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where it is determined to be a small hit at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of The percentage determined as "small hit" is higher than when variable display is performed.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the suspension memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131 a of the case. Further, FIG. 8E shows the case where the jackpot type is determined by using the retention memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  When it is determined that the big hit classification determination table 131a, 131b is to make the variable display result a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit "normal big hit", based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination, " It is a table to be referred to in order to determine either “probability big hit” or “suddenly big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), eight judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes Whereas in the big hit classification determination table 131b, 2 judgment values are assigned to the "sudden probability change big hit" (a ratio of 2/40). The case where it is determined to be a definite big hit suddenly. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is start winning and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is start winning and the second special symbol of As compared with the case where the variable display is performed, the rate at which the "sudden probability change big hit" is determined is high. "Suddenly probability variation big hit" is distributed only to the first special symbol big hit classification determination table 131a, and "suddenly probability variation big hit" is not distributed to the second special symbol big hit classification determination table 131b (that is, , And may be determined as "suddenly probability variation big hit" only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), the sudden specific variation jackpot of two rounds as the first specific gaming state for giving a predetermined amount of gaming value, and more than the gaming value There are cases where it is decided that 15 rounds "normal big hit" and "probable variation big hit" as the second specific gaming state that grants a large amount of game value, and it is high when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed Although it is determined to make the first specific gaming state in proportion, the gaming value to be provided is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, as the gaming value to determine the second specific gaming state to increase the allowable number of winning number (count number) of gaming balls to the large winning opening per round It is also good. In addition, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, a second specific gaming state may be determined in which the opening time of the big winning opening per jackpot as a gaming value is increased as the gaming value. Also, for example, even if it is a big hit of the same 15 rounds, a first specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened once per round, and a second specific gaming state in which the large winning opening is opened multiple times per round The game value of the second specific gaming state may be enhanced by preparing and opening the number of times of opening of the special winning opening substantially. In this case, for example, in either the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds) In the case of the second specific gaming state, an undigested round is left), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to ask whether or not the big hit continues further. Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the big hit game is ended based on the end of all 15 rounds, and in the case of the second specific gaming state based on the remaining undivided rounds. , The big hit game continues (the effect that the opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after ending the big hit of 15 times open) may be made to be.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are "normal big hit", "probably big hit" and "suddenly big hit" as the big hit types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is limited to those shown in this embodiment. Absent. For example, a big hit may be provided to control 7 rounds of big hit games, or a big hit may be provided to control 5 rounds of big hit games. Also, in this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, and “suddenly big hit”, but not limited to three types, for example, four or more big hit types You may Also, conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that controls to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state and shifts to a positive changing state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a high probability state and time saving state (high The state is also shifted to the base state (see steps S169 to S171 described later). Then, after shifting to the definite change state, the positive change state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S132 described later).

  In addition, "normal big hit" is controlled to big hit game state of 15 rounds, it is not transferred to definite change state (high probability state) after the big hit game state ends, big hit is transferred only to time saving state (high base state) (See step S167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state (high base state) is maintained until execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is ended a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (see steps S137 to S140 described later) ). In this embodiment, the time saving state (high base state) ends even if a big hit occurs before the end of the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times after shifting to the time saving state (step S132 described later) reference).

  In addition, “Suddenly positive variation big hit” is allowed up to the number of times the number of opening of the big winning opening is smaller than “positive variation big hit” or “normal big hit” (in this embodiment, 2 times opening for 0.1 seconds) It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden odd change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit gaming state of two rounds. In addition, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in "perhaps big hit" and "usually big hitting", while the opening time of big winning opening per round in "suddenly big changing big hit" However, it is extremely short as 0.1 second, and it can hardly be expected that the game ball will be won in the big winning opening during the big hit game. And in this embodiment, after the termination of the sudden oddity big hit gaming state is shifted to the definite change state (in this embodiment, it is only shifted to the high probability state and not to the high base state. Steps described later) See S169 to S171).

  In this embodiment, even in the case of "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is performed twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as the big hit gaming state by "suddenly positive variation big hit" is performed. It will be. Then, in the case of "small hit", after the opening of the special winning opening is finished, the gaming state does not change, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it is possible to make it impossible to recognize whether the game is a sudden sudden big hit or a small hit, and improve the interest of the game. In addition, for example, when it comprises so that all the big hit types may be a definite variation big hit, it is not necessary to provide a small hit.

  The jackpot type judgment tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and the judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probably variable big hit", and "suddenly odd variable big hit" ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the big hit type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit as the type corresponding to the matched big hit type determination value.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, according to the jackpot type determination result, a fluctuation pattern type, a random number for fluctuation pattern type determination It is a table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, which is normal CA 3-1 to normal CA 3-2, Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of the super CA 3-3, the special CA 4-1, and the special CA 4-2 are set.

  For example, the variation pattern type determination table 132A for big hit shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normally big hit”, and FIG. 9 (B) used when the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in, the allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different.

  As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the jackpot type. In addition, determination values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different fluctuation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made, and the ratio determined to be the same fluctuation pattern type can be made different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least Super Reach (Super Reach A, Super Reach B) is performed.

  In addition, for super reach big hit, fluctuation pattern type with pseudo ream (fluctuation pattern type including fluctuation patterns of super PA3-3, super PA3-4) and fluctuation pattern type without pseudo ream (super PB3-3, super And the variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, a variation pattern type with a super reach and a pseudo run, a super reach and a pseudo run, in both the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal hit and the big hit for the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B. A variation pattern type not to be accompanied is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation big hit", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1, special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation big hit" The judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is suddenly controlled to the big hit state according to the big hit type being "suddenly big hit big hit", it is different from the case where the big hit state due to the big hit or positive hit It can be determined as the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory view showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, when it is determined that the variable display result is made a small hit symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random number (random 2) for change pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), in the case where it is determined to be a small hit, it is shown that special CA 4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the release variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among them, FIG. 10A shows that the gaming state is the low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state) and the number of memories (total number of pending memories) is less than three. An out-of-plane variation pattern type determination table 135A to be used is shown. Also, in FIG. 10B, the variation for disconnection used when the gaming state is the low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state) and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. A pattern type determination table 135B is shown. Further, FIG. 10 (C) shows a variation pattern type determination table for disengagement 135C used when the gaming state is the high base state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state). . When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a disappointing pattern, a plurality of types of variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for loss are used based on random numbers (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table referenced to determine one of

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, different variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135D for loss are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. A common deviation change pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base loss variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages, but the high base loss variation pattern type determination table is used. It is also possible to use a plurality of variation pattern judgment tables for loss (tables having different ratios of judgment values) according to the total number of pending storages.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the outset variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the combined suspension storage number is less than 3, and the combined suspension storage number is 3 or more Although two types of tables, such as the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table 135B used in the case, are used, the way of dividing the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for 0 total pending storage numbers, 1 total pending storage number, 2 total pending storage numbers) The outset fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used separately for the total number of pending storages of three, the total number of pending storages for four, and so on). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, and the total pending storage number 4.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of pending storages, but according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number, the outlier variation pattern type determination table is used. A plurality may be provided. For example, when performing variable display of the first special symbol, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number) Out of change variation pattern type judgment table for 0, 1 first pending storage number, 2 for 1st pending storage number, 3 for 1st pending storage number, 4 for 1st pending storage number, ... Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first number of pending storages may be used. For example, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table may be used for the first pending storage number 0 to 2, for the first pending storage number 3, for the first pending storage number 4. Even in this case, when the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages are large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. . In addition, even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that the “specific variable display pattern” is a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least the expectation for a big hit, such as a variation pattern with super reach, is set high and the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, “expected degree (reliability) for big hit” means an appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to a specific rendering mode is performed. For example, the jackpot expectation when the variable indication with the super reach is executed is determined as (proportion of the super reach being executed if it is determined to be the big hit) / (when it is determined to be the big hit and to the left The rate at which the super reach is performed in both cases is calculated by calculating

  In each of the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the values of the random numbers (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type judgment, which are non reach CA2-1 to non reach CA2-1. A judgment value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of 3, normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, and super CA 2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is low and the base state is low, in this embodiment, the random number (random 2) for the fluctuation pattern type determination If the value is 230 to 251, it is understood that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is low and the base state is low, in this embodiment, the random number (random 2) for the fluctuation pattern type determination is used. If the value is 1 to 79, it is understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least not with the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo ream or the slip effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A, 135B) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (the variation pattern with the reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights stored by the pending storage means (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer) (the first pending storage count, the second pending storage count, the total pending storage count) Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are configured to be assigned. Note that “variable display patterns other than reach variable display patterns”, as described in this embodiment, for example, do not involve reach, do not accompany effects such as pseudo-trains or slip effects, and the variable display results It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state, but whether the current gaming state is a definite change state or a normal probability state According to the presence or absence, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table separately prepared may be used. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the shortening fluctuation pattern is determined by selecting the shortening out-of-order fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 10 (B). There may be cases, but the threshold value of the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) when the variation pattern of shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state may be made different. . For example, when the gaming state is the low base state, if the total number of pending storages is 3 (or, for example, the number of first pending storages and the number of second pending storages is 2), for shortening The variation pattern type determination table for out-of-the-box is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortening variation may be determined, and when the gaming state is the high base state, the total number of pending storages is smaller in 1 or 2. Even in the case (or, for example, even in the case of 0 or 1 where the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are smaller), the variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected for shortening and the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined You may be asked to

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. In the hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "big hit" or "small hit", the change pattern determination is performed according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine a fluctuation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is to be any of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3, hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that one of CA4-1 and the special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative pattern is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the "big hit".

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the variation pattern type includes normal CA 3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo link. The case where it is classified into a certain normal CA3-2 and a super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a super reach (sometimes with a pseudo reach with a super reach) is shown. Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA 4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA 4- that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with a reach. The case of being classified into 2 is shown. In addition, in FIG. 11 (B), you may divide a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of production | presentation, such as a pseudo | simulation series and a slip production, instead of dividing a fluctuation pattern classification by the presence or absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG 1-1 and the special PG 2-1 which are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by effects such as pseudo run or slip effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes pseudo run or slip You may comprise so that special PG1-2 with special effects, such as presentation, special PG1-3, and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view showing the out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A determines that the variable display result is “off” based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to decide fluctuation pattern in either of multiple types. The out-of-out variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, command 80XX (H) is a production control command (a variation pattern command for specifying a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on ) (Each corresponding to fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and a type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specification commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation specification command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation specification command and the second symbol variation specification command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol variation specification command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8E01 (H) is an ordinary symbol start specification (hit) command that indicates that the display result of the ordinary symbol is a hit and indicates that the variation of the ordinary symbol is started, and the command 8E02 (H) is an ordinary symbol It is a normal symbol start designation (drop) command that indicates that the display result of is to be out and that the variation of the normal pattern is to be started. The command 8E03 (H) is a normal symbol variation end designation command indicating that the variation (variable display) of the normal symbol is ended. However, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is constant according to the gaming state (high base state / low base state), the normal symbol fluctuation end designation command may not be used.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise initialization designation Send a command

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for specifying a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A 001 and A 002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fan fare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, depending on the type of big hit, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden definite positive big hit start designation command is used. Specifically, the jackpot start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probably big hit", and the small hit in the case of "suddenly big hit" or "small hit" The sudden definite big hit start specification command (A 002 (H)) is used. Although the game control microcomputer 560 suddenly transmits a fanfare designation command for a definite big hit start designation when it is a big hit suddenly, it does not send a fan fare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) showing a display of a number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set to the EXT data and transmitted for the special winning opening open designation command, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening of the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted after the special winning opening open command, a different special winning opening after opening specification command is transmitted every round. For example, when the first round in the big hit game is ended, the designated special command (A 201 (H)) is sent after the opening of the big winning opening which designates the round 1, and the tenth round in the big hit game is ended. Is sent after the special winning opening opening specifying the round 10, a specification command (A30A (H)).

  The command A 301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designated command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, the end of the big hit game. The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending a big hit game by “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. The command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden definite positive big hit end designation command: ending 2 specified command) for specifying the end of the small hit game or the sudden end of the big hit. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit the ending designation command for the sudden change big hit termination specification suddenly in the case of the sudden change big hit, but not to send the ending specification command in the case of the small hit. It is also good.

  The command B 001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / low base state background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the low probability / low base state. The command B 002 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / high base state background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the low probability / high base state. The command B 003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state. The command B 004 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize designation command) for designating that there has been a second start prize. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first starting winning a prize designation command and the second starting winning a prize designation command may be generically referred to as a starting winning a prize designation command.

  The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first pending storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first pending storage number has increased by one. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second pending storage number addition designation command) for specifying that the second pending storage number has increased by one.

  In this embodiment, for the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages, an effect control command indicating that the number of pending storages has been increased is transmitted, but an effect control that designates the number of pending storages itself A command may be sent. In that case, for example, while transmitting the effect control command which designates which of the 1st starting winning a prize mouth 13 and the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 14 had a starting winning a prize, as a pending storage number designation command which designates the pending storage number A common effect control command is transmitted between the one pending storage number and the second pending storage number.

  Also, when the number of pending storages decreases, a pending storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number decreases (the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction The designated command may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a command for designating the number of pending storages, a first pending storage number addition designating command for designating an increase in the number of first pending storages is transmitted when the first pending storage increases When the pending storage increases, the second pending storage number addition designation command to designate the increase of the second pending storage number is transmitted, but even if the combined pending storage number designation command specifying the total pending storage number is sent. Good.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design designation command) indicating whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, or the type of the big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XX (H) is the effect control command indicating the determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random value for the variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning time determination process (see FIG. 27) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit at the start winning, whether it will be a small hit or not It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of which determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a type of a big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and Based on the fluctuation category command, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined in the winning determination process described later that the "out" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is to be made, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that it becomes a “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that "the sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set to the EXT data. Also, for example, when it is determined that "small hit" will be, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read out when setting the symbol specifying command and when setting the display result specifying command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state and which display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol are displayed, the random pattern determination random number at the start winning A value is set to the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of R falls within the range of any determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state) and removal at the start winning, the CPU 56 first performs step S232 of the prize determination processing described later. It is determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation pattern of non-reach CA2-1 in the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the number of pending storages (total number of pending storages) Since the type is commonly assigned, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type becomes non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the change category 1 command. it can. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set to the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set to the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination value 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Because of this, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the change pattern type is super CA 2-7 based on the reception of the change category 8 command.

  The threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above change categories belongs to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. These values are derived by extracting values that can be the boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the out-of-plane variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the other variation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and it is assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by extracting values that may be boundaries of the range of the determined values.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high base state (high probability / high base state or low probability / high base state) and disengaged at the start winning, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 of the prize determination process described later. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 2 19 (ie, if it becomes the variation pattern type of non-reach CA 2-3), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “08 (H)” Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send variation category 10 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “normal big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the winning determination processing described later. Determine if If the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, if it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets fluctuation data in which “10 (H)” is set to the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 22 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-3). Send variation category 23 command.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that “certainly hit big hit” is determined at the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the winning determination processing described later. Determine if If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “13 (H)” as the variation category Send 24 commands. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it becomes the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA 3-2) Send variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3) Send variation category 26 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the start winning combination suddenly becomes a definite positive big hit, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning determination processing described later. Determine If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-1), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “16 (H)” as the variation category 27 Send a command. Next, if the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, if it becomes the variation pattern type of special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data to “17 (H)” as the variation category Send 28 commands.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the start winning combination, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set to the EXT data.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. Do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbol every time there is a start winning and the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command consisting of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used

  In addition, as a method of sending out the effect control command, the effect control command data is outputted to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31 via the relay substrate 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) take-in signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing take-in of effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of taking in 1-byte data by interrupt processing.

  Next, normal symbol process processing (step S28) executed by the CPU 56 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when it is detected that the gate switch 32a is turned on, that is, when the gaming ball passes through the gate 32 (step S411), the CPU 56 executes gate switch passing processing (step S412). Thereafter, the process of any one of steps S400 to S404 is performed.

  The process of steps S400 to S404 is the following process.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S400): The CPU 56 can start changing the normal symbol (for example, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is not being displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and the variable winning prize is not In the case where the ball device 15 is not in the open state), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to hit (whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is hit or not). Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (“1” in this example) indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

  Normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401): Normal symbol process by setting a value equivalent to the variable display time (variation time of normal symbol) until variable symbol is displayed and derived and displayed. Start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("2" in this example) according to the normal symbol variation processing (step S402).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S402): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10. Also, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer, and the value of the normal symbol process flag indicates the normal symbol stop processing (step S403) ( In this example, it is updated to "3".

  Normal symbol stop process (step S403): The CPU 56 confirms whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or not. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("0" in this example) indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400). If the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the normal symbol process timer is started by setting a value corresponding to the normal motor combination operating time to the normal symbol process timer. In addition, the variable winning ball device (normally powered combination) 15 is opened. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("4" in this example) indicating the processing during normal motorized combination opening (step S404).

  Normal electric role opening process (step S404): When the normal symbol process timer times out, the CPU 56 closes the variable winning ball device 15 and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to normal symbol normal processing (step S400) Update to the value shown (in this example, "0").

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing an example of a regular symbol per product determination table in which a determination value regarding a regular symbol is set. In this embodiment, the range which the random number for determination per normal symbol can take is 1 to 250, but in the determination table for common symbol, the determination value is set by comparing with the random value for determination per normal symbol.

  FIG. 19A shows a table used in the low base state. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the low base state, a hit is determined with a probability of 2/250. When it is determined to be a hit, the variable winning ball device (normal motorized role) 15 is opened once (open time is 5.8 seconds). In the low base state, the fluctuation time (variable display time) of the normal symbol is 10 seconds. However, a plurality of types of fluctuation time may be prepared as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the CPU 56 may select the fluctuation time to be used from among them. Further, either or both of the open number and open time (for example, a time shorter than 5.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 are prepared, and the CPU 56 selects either or both of the open number and open time. It may be selected.

  In addition, the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be further provided with a short open contact of 0.2 seconds, for example. In that case, a hit is made so as to open for a long time (for example, 5.8 seconds) after opening for 0.2 seconds, so as to enhance the player's sense of expectation (for opening for a long time) when opening for a short time. It is also good. In addition, when both the opening for a short period and the opening for a long period after opening for a short period are provided, the timing for notifying the predetermined effect (o) or the predetermined effect (x) is a short period of time. It may be after opening. In such a case, when opening for a short time is performed, it can not be determined whether opening for a long time is performed by execution of a predetermined effect, and the player's sense of expectation (for opening for a long time) Can be raised more.

  FIG. 19 (B) shows a table used in the high base state (short time state). As shown in FIG. 19B, in the high base state, a hit is determined with a probability of 249/250. When it is determined to be a hit, the variable winning ball device (normally powered combination) 15 is opened three times (each opening time is 1.8 seconds). In the high base state, the variation time (variable display time) of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is in the low base state, it is hit with low probability, and in the high base state, it is extremely high probability (in this example, it is about 100%, but it may be 100%). Become a hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, in the high base state, the probability of the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol being hit is increased compared to the case of the low base state (general In the high base state, the variable winning ball device 15 is likely to be in the open state with a high frequency so as to facilitate start winning, but this is not the only mode. For example, in the high base state and in the low base state, although the probability that the variation display result of the normal symbol is hit is the same in the high base state and in the low base state, In comparison, by increasing the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (normal motor combination opening time shown in FIG. 19), in the case of a high base state, it is configured to be easy to start winning. May be

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing gate switch passing processing. In the gate switch passing process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the count value (the number of gate passing memories) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example) (step S 415). If the maximum value has not been reached, the CPU 56 increments the count value of the gate passage storage counter by 1 (step S416), extracts the value of the random number per random pattern (random 4) per software symbol and is gate passage storage It is stored in a storage area (general drawing reserve storage buffer provided in the RAM 55) corresponding to the value of the number (step S417). In addition, the CPU 56 increases the number of lighting of the normal symbol holding storage indicator 41 by 1 (step S418).

  CPU 56 is in a state capable of starting fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol normal processing of step S400, and is stored in the storage area (general view retention storage buffer) if the number of gate passage storage is not 0. Determines whether or not to hit (determine whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be hit symbol or not) using the value of the random symbol for determining the normal symbol being hit and the determination table for the normal symbol shown in FIG. 19 Do. That is, if the value of the random number per symbol normal determination is in agreement with any of the determination values (determination values corresponding to per) set in the normal symbol per capita determination table, it is determined to be a hit. When it is determined to be a hit, a normal symbol hit flag is set. It should be noted that the CPU 56 uses the table shown in FIG. 19A if the gaming state is the low base state (if the high base flag is not set), and if it is the high base state (high base flag Is set, the table shown in FIG. 19 (B) is used. In this embodiment, the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is a hit is also expressed as a spread figure.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation pattern setting processing (step S401) in normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the current gaming state is the high base state (step S431). Specifically, it is checked whether the high base flag is set. If it is in the high base state, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer (step S432). If it is in the low base state, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer (step S433).

  In addition, when it is decided to hit with normal symbol normal processing (when normal symbol hitting flag is set) (step S434), it is decided to use the display result of normal symbol as a hit and it is normal. Control is performed to transmit a normal symbol start designation (hit) command indicating start of variation of the symbol to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S435). If it is determined to be a deviation in the normal symbol normal processing, the normal symbol start specification (drop) command indicating that the display result of the normal symbol is determined to be disjointed and the variation of the normal symbol is started is indicated. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the gate passage storage counter by 1 (step S437), sets the value of the gate passage storage counter after subtraction (that is, the number of common drawing reservations) as EXT data, Control is performed to transmit a storage number specification command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S438).

  Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") corresponding to the ordinary symbol variation process (step S402) (step S439).

  When transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (previously set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command in the pointer. . Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28).

  In this embodiment, in the normal symbol variation pattern setting process, the normal symbol variation start designation command and the common drawing reserve storage number designation command are transmitted, but in step S400 of the normal symbol normal processing, the normal symbol display result is hit. Even after deciding whether or not to make a normal pattern change start specification command is transmitted, or the count value of the gate passage storage counter is decremented by 1 to transmit a common drawing reserve storage number specification command Good.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing (step S402). In the normal symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S441). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S441), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step S445).

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (Y in step S441), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the normal symbol fluctuation end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 At the same time as (step S442), the normal symbol stop symbol display time is set to the normal symbol process timer (step S443). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "3") indicating normal symbol stop processing (step S403) (step S444).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop time processing (step S403). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S451). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, the value of the normal symbol process timer is decremented by 1 (step S452).

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed, the CPU 56 confirms whether the normal symbol hit flag is set or not (step S453).

  If the normal symbol hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol process timer to a value corresponding to the normal motor-operated part operating time (5.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds) (step S454). In addition, the CPU 56 opens the variable winning ball device (normal motor combination) 15 (step S455).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the ordinary electric character combination open process (step S404) (step S459).

  When it is determined in step S453 that the normal symbol hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400). It updates (step S460).

  The CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 in the processing during opening of the normal motor combination, and when the value of the normal pattern process timer becomes 0, the variable winning ball device (normally connected electric combination) 15 is closed. Do. Then, when the ordinary motor-operated part operating time is 5.8 seconds (when one opening is performed, ie, in the low base state), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is normally processed normally (step S400) Update to a value (specifically, "0") indicating. If the normal motor part operation time is 1.8 seconds (when three times of opening are performed, ie, in the case of high base state), when three times of opening are completed, the normal symbol process flag The value is updated to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400). When the opening is not completed three times, the CPU 56 sets the normal symbol process timer to a value corresponding to the normal electric combination operating time (1.8 seconds), and makes the variable winning ball device 15 open again. Do. The CPU 56 does not immediately open the variable winning ball device 15, but opens it when a predetermined interval time has elapsed.

  In this embodiment, microcomputer 560 for game control does not transmit the effect control command regarding the open state of variable winning ball device 15, but indicates the closing when the open state of variable winning ball device 15 ends. A presentation control command may be transmitted. If the game control microcomputer 560 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to be closed if there is a predetermined number of winnings even if the opening time has not elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 100 still has the variable winnings Although it recognizes that the ball device 15 is open, a situation occurs in which the variable winning ball device 15 is actually closed. When the effect control command indicating closing is configured to be transmitted, such erroneous recognition of the effect control microcomputer 100 can be prevented. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 100 is configured to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the notification can be ended based on the effect control command indicating the closing.

  FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes start opening switch passage processing (step S312). Then, one of the processes in steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the hold memory buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is considered as a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

  Fluctuation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the microcomputer 100 for effect control is determined Control to transmit a designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Incidentally, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol determination designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the decoration display device 9 to be stopped.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. The data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control process of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is five. In the special winning opening open processing, control is performed to open the special winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control which transmits the special winning a prize opening opening designated command to the micro-computer 100 for production control, the execution time of the special winning a prize opening opening processing is set with the timer, internal state (special symbol process flag) step S306 Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. Further, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted with the value specifying the round set in the EXT data, the different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted every round. For example, when executing the first round in the big hit game, the large winning opening opening designated command (A101 (H)) for specifying the round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round in the big hit game , A special winning opening opening specification command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10 is transmitted.

  Large winning opening open processing (step S306): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special winning opening open processing, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control which transmits the specified command after the opening in the big hit to the microcomputer 100 for production control, when all rounds are finished, internal state (special symbol process flag) the value which corresponds to step S307 (this value In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, processing is performed to set a flag (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) indicating the gaming state. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of gaming balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening open process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, small hit opening pre-processing is executed for each opening of the big winning opening in the small hit game, but when starting the first open in the small hit game, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit It is also a process to start.

  Small hit open processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is nine. Perform processing such as confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. A control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312. In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (step S1211). If the 1st starting opening switch 13a is not an ON state, it will transfer to step S1223. If the first starting port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1223.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1214).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 26) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, hardware R is a random R (big hit determination random number), a software random number is a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 26 is an explanatory drawing showing an example of the configuration of the pending storage buffer. As shown in FIG. 26, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. Being formed in the RAM means that it is an area in the RAM.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating that the gaming state is the high base state is set (step S1216). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1219. If the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1217). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1219 as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a prize determination process in which the variation display result and variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined in advance at the start winning. (Step S1218).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning a prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1219). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize determination process (step S1220), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1221). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1222).

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (predetermined for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set to the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the processing of steps S1220 and S1221, and the CPU 56 selects a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 and executes a prize-time effect process of step S1218. And the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is generated by executing the processing of steps S1219 to S1222, the first start winning specifying command, the symbol specifying command, the variation category A set of four commands of the command and the first pending storage count addition designation command is transmitted collectively in one timer interrupt process.

  However, when the prize effect processing of step S1218 is not executed because of the determination of Y in step S1216 or step S1217, the CPU 56 executes only the first start winning combination designation command and the first suspension storage number addition designation command. Control to transmit is performed, and control to transmit a determination result specifying command at winning a prize (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. It should be noted that when the winning effect process of step S 1218 is not executed, a value indicating the inability to specify the winning determination result (for example, “FF (H)”) is set as the EXT data, and the winning determination result is designated. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1216, only when the gaming state is the low base state, step S1218 is performed. A prize effect process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 by executing the processing of step S1217, step S1218 is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. At the time of winning the effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not shift to step S1218 only in the big hit gaming state, and may shift to step S1218 to execute the prize effect processing in the small hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control that the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening of the final round is finished and the end of the big hit is notified. Specifically, the processing from the big winning opening opening pre-processing (see step S305) to the big hit end processing (see step S307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (step S1223). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether the value of the number counter is 4 or not is confirmed (step S1224). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1225) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 26) (step S1227) . In the process of step S1227, hardware R random number R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. The variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) is not extracted in the start opening switch passage process (at start winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. May be For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning determination process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1229). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the prize determination process (step S1230), and transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1231). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserve storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the winning determination process of steps S1218 and S1228. In the prize determination process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing to be described later at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the type of big hit or the variation pattern setting processing However, before the variation display based on the start winning is started at the timing when the game ball is started to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. By executing the winning determination process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number fall within which range of the determination value. By doing so, the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type are predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the microcomputer for effect control is based on the judgment result at the time of winning as described later. By performing anticipation notice effect to predict that it will be a big hit or super reach during the change display of the decoration pattern by 100.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 is in a high probability state (probability state. High probability / high base state and high probability / high probability / It is checked whether the high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation shown in the right column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S222).

  In addition, although this embodiment is configured to preferentially execute the variable display of the second special symbol, in the prize determination process, the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R), low probability state It is possible to execute only the process of comparing with the big hit determination value in the case and not to compare with the big hit determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is performed, steps S221 and S222). Process may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual variation do not match It can prevent the situation from happening.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of definite variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 and FIG. The small hit determination values shown in (C) and (C) are compared, and it is confirmed whether they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning determination process of step S 1218 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hitting determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8B). It is determined whether it matches with the small hit judgment value set in (for special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning determination process of step S1228), a small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (C) It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it becomes "off" as the symbol designation command Processing is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing to determine the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the high probability state and in the high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). To determine if it is In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are established in step S225 at the start winning combination, the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, after checking whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are confirmed in step S225 at the start winning combination, the game state is performed from when the variable display based on the starting winning combination is actually started. There are cases where (for example, when a definite variation big hit or a sudden variation) occurs before the start of the change, the state changes from the normal probability state to the definite variation state. Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning is not necessarily the same as the gaming state (see step S61 described later) determined at the start of fluctuation. In addition, in order to prevent such non-coincidence, a game with a change of gaming state in the currently stored holding memory is specified, and determination at the time of starting winning is performed based on the gaming state after the change. It is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for removal in accordance with the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination in advance is incorporated, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within the range of any determination value by determining whether it is larger than the threshold value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the high base state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 219 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 219 (ie, when it is 1 to 219) Determines that “08 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When it is not the threshold 219 or less (ie, when it is 220-251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the low base state, the CPU sets thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 79 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 89 or less (ie, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 99 or less (ie, 90 to 99), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (ie, when it is 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is equal to or less than the threshold 214 (ie, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (ie, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 229 or less (ie, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of threshold determination shown above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in ascending order of threshold value, so the one determined in the later order threshold is used. It does not fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 or less of the threshold value of the previous order. It is determined whether or not it is in the range of Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown where determination is made as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order of threshold value, but conversely, 229, 214, in ascending order of threshold value. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. The same applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values described below.

  Note that the threshold in the low base state may be always set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, the range of the determination value is common to at least the variation pattern type for “non-reach out” and the variation pattern type for “super reach”, so “non-reach It can be determined whether or not it becomes "off" or "super reach".

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 designates the EXT data "05 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" will be the symbol designation command A process of setting to is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a small hit threshold (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251, and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (which is 1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined to set the EXT data “18 (H)” without performing the threshold determination.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of big hit based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning on the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning determination process of step S 1218 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first one shown in FIG. 8D). Using the special symbol) 131a, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal big hit", "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit". In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 (when performing the winning determination process of step S1228), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) Using 131 b, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data according to the determination result of the big hit type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that "normal big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that "normal big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "certain variation big hit" is to be performed, the CPU 56 performs processing of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is to be made to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that "suddenly a probability change big hit" is found, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that "sudden change probability big hit" will be made as a symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for big hit according to the big hit classification determined at Step S229 (Step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it determines that "normal big hit". In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and the value is equal to or less than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 149 or less (ie, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In addition, when it is not the threshold value 149 or less (ie, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined to set "12 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the “probable big hit” is made, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 38 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 38 (ie, 1 to 38). Determines that “13 (H)” is set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold is not 79 or less (ie, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Also, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that "a sudden probability big hit", the threshold value 100 is set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold 100 in step S232 described later, and the value is less than or equal to the threshold 100 (i.e., 1 to 100). Determines that “16 (H)” is to be set as EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 100 or less (ie, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1215 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment. It is determined whether the range is the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, and the fluctuation pattern type set in step S232 The range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number or any variation pattern type may be determined using the determination table.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result as a variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 selects one of “00 (H)” to “0 B (H)”, “10 B (H)”, and “10 (H)” as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. (H) “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command.

  In this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined whether the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within which range. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit will be made, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it is determined that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command indicating comprehensively a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, although it is not shown up to which variation pattern type specifically the microcomputer 100 for effect control, it is indicated that the variation pattern type comprehensively becomes any of the big hit variation pattern types On the basis of the reception of the category command, a pre-reading notice effect to be described later may be executed.

  FIGS. 28 and 29 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined pending storage number counter.

  If the total number of pending storages is 0, it is checked whether the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag is set or not (step S51A). If the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag is set, the process is ended. If the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag is not set, the customer waiting demo specification command is executed on the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the point when the total number of pending storage becomes 0. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S51B). Then, the customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag is set (step S51C), and the process is ended. The customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag is reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started. In this embodiment, when the period in which the variation (variable display) of the special symbol is not performed exceeds 30 seconds, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

  If the total number of pending storages is not 0, and if it is set, the CPU 56 resets a customer waiting demo specification command transmitted flag (step S51D). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage number counter is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) The data which shows "the 2nd" is set to (step S53). If the second pending storage number is 0, the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed on the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, control is performed such that the second start condition for starting the variation display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variation display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number 1 of pending storages indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total number of pending storages by one. In other words, the count value of the total hold storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S57).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the current gaming state (step S58). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating that the high probability state is set is set, and the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the CPU 56 determines the high probability / high base state. Control to send background specification command. Also, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability / low base state background designation command when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set. Also, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a low probability / high base state background designation command when only the high base flag is set and the high probability flag is not set. Also, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a low probability / low base state background designation command if neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1215 or step S1227 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8) with the jackpot judgment random number, and executes processing for deciding to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. Is a program that That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, if the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), it will be a big hit than in the case where the gaming state is non positive change state (normal probability state) It is configured to have a high probability. Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and when the gaming state is a definite change state, processing of the determination of the big hit using the big change determination table at the positive change time, the gaming state is normal When it is in the probability state, the process of determination of the big hit is performed using the normal-time big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  In addition, confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is a definite change state is performed based on whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the positive changing state, and is reset when the positive changing state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” and is set in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). And perform a small hit determination process. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B) Use) to decide whether to make a small hit or not. In addition, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not the small hit is made using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to make the small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and the process proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type to any one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (D). When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, using the selected big hit type determination table, the CPU 56 uses the type (“normal big hit”, “probable variation”) corresponding to the value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area. A "big hit" or "a sudden definite big hit" is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1215 or step S1227 of the starting opening switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and determines the big hit type. Do. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Suddenly, the probability that a big hit is selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined type of the big hit in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "suddenly, there is a definite variation big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is an out pattern is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, according to the determination result of the big hit type, it decides the stop design of the special symbol “1”, “3”, “7” which becomes the big hit symbol. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "suddenly positive variation big hit", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "big hit" is determined, the "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol And, when it is decided to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is decided to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is determined first, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big hit type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is It is not limited to the one shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol and the big hit type are associated in advance is prepared, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the big hit type determination random number, the corresponding big hit based on the determination result The type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing (step S301) in the special symbol process processing. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A) as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D (FIG. 9 (D ) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state (high base state), and is reset when the short time state (high base state) is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be "normally big hit" or "probably big hit" and is set in the process of ending the big hit game.

  If the high base flag is not set (step S95), that is, if the gaming state is low base state (high probability / low base state or low probability / low base state), the CPU 56 counts the total number of pending storages. Is checked whether it is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135A (as a table used to determine the type of variation pattern as any one of a plurality of types). FIG. 10A is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is three or more, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss 135B (FIG. 10 (B (B)) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set, that is, if the gaming state is the high probability / high base state or the low probability / high base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for the selection, a release variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state and the total number of pending storages is three or more by executing the processing of steps S95 to S101, for the removal shown in FIG. 10 (B) The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the variation pattern type determination table for disengagement 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the change pattern type in the process of step S102 described later, and when the change pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the change is performed in step S105. As a pattern, non-reach PA-1 and shortening fluctuation are determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high base state or the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (refer to FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved memories ( Although the table shown in FIG. 10B is different from the table shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the high base state, if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), The fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether the total number of pending storages is approximately 0 or not, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the variation pattern type for loss The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first holding storage buffer or the second holding storage buffer), and selects it in the processing of step S92, S94, S98, S99 or S101. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. And one of the out-of-out variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) (step S103). In addition, by reading random 3 (random pattern determination random number) from the random number buffer area (first reserve storage buffer or second reserve storage buffer) and referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S103, the variation pattern Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S105). In addition, when it is comprised so that random 3 (random number for a fluctuation pattern determination) may not be extracted at the timing of starting winning a prize, CPU56 is a random number counter for a fluctuation pattern determination for generating a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). It is also possible to extract values directly from and to determine a fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the effect control command (the change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In addition, when it is determined to be a loss, instead of immediately determining the variation pattern type, it may be determined whether to be a reach by lottery processing using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (including the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. 10) and the reach fluctuation pattern type determination table (FIG. 10) Prepare the normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and the super CA 2-7 (including variation pattern types) and select one of the variation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  Further, when it is determined whether or not reach is determined by lottery processing using random numbers for reach determination, the number of reach may be determined according to the total number of pending storages (which may be the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number). A reach determination table with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach probability is lowered as the number of pending storage increases. In this case, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table, for example, in the determination of whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” is made in the winning determination process. Whether or not to reach may be determined in advance by determining whether or not it is reached. In addition, in view of the fact that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach deviates” according to the fluctuation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to configure in advance to determine whether or not to be "non-reach out" and to perform preview advance notice effects.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the effect control command (see FIG. 13) of the display result 1 specification to the display result 5 specification according to the determined type, small hit, or removal of the determined big hit. Control to Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the jackpot flag is set, if the type of the jackpot is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer is "01" in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing, specifically, whether it is "normal big hit" or not. . Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). In addition, it can be specifically determined by checking whether the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02" or not whether it is "a certainty big hit" or not. . Then, when it is neither “normal big hit” nor “probable big hit” (ie, when it is “suddenly big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designated command (step S115).

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when the small hit flag is off, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation in progress processing (step S303) in the special symbol process processing. During special symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1125), and when the variation time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit the symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (Step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S304) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the jackpot flag is set, if it is set, the CPU 56 is a high probability flag indicating that it is a probability change state (high probability state) or a high that indicates that it is a short time state (high base state) The base flag and the high base frequency counter indicating the variable symbol count of the special symbol in the short time state (high base state) are reset (step S132). Also, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the jackpot type is normally a jackpot or a probability change jackpot, and when the jackpot type is a sudden jackpot, a small hit / sudden turn A jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). The type of the big hit is determined by data (data stored in the big hit type buffer) indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55.

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the big hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). Further, the opening number (for example, 15) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S135). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  When it is confirmed in step S131 that the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 determines that the value of the high base frequency counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the short time state (high base state) is 0 It is checked whether or not it is present (step S137). If the value of the high base frequency counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S145. If the value of the high base frequency counter is not 0 (that is, if it is controlled to the low probability / high base state after ending the big hit game based on the normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the value of the high base frequency counter − 1 is performed (step S138). Then, when the value of the high base frequency counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S140). Then, the process proceeds to step S145.

  In step S145, the CPU 56 confirms whether the small hit flag is set. If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S150. If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hit / suddenly probability variation big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying that the small hit has occurred in the effect display device 9) is set in the special winning opening control timer (step S147). Further, the opening number (specifically, twice) is set in the opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  In step S150, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S160), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control to transmit a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). In step S162, the CPU 56 transmits a big hit end designation command (command A 301 (H)) when the type of big hit is a big hit or a definite big hit, and when the big hit type is a sudden big hit suddenly. The small hit / suddenly positive variation big hit end specification command (command A 302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process is ended.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If it has not, the process is ended.

  If the big hit end display time has passed, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag to shift to the short time state (high base state) when the type of the big hit is normally the big hit (step S166). (Step S167). That is, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game which is usually based on the big hit. Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base frequency counter a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (step S168). The type of the big hit is determined by data (data stored in the big hit type buffer) indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55.

  If it is not a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag to shift to a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S169). Next, if the type of the big hit is a definite variation big hit (step S170), the CPU 56 sets a high base flag to shift to a time saving state (high base state) (step S171). That is, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a definite variation big hit (that is, if the type of the big hit is a sudden variation large hit), the process proceeds to step S172 without executing step S171. That is, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / low base state after the end of the big hit game based on the sudden change big hit. The type of the big hit is determined by data (data stored in the big hit type buffer) indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in the process of steps S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether to increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. In addition, the high base flag is used to determine whether or not to reduce the variation time of the special symbol.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S172).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 as effect control means. In the main process, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (step S 701). .

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a predetermined random number (step S702). Then, the timer interrupt flag is monitored (step S703). If the timer interrupt flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S702. When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interruption flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S704), and executes the effect control process of steps S705 to S708.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S705).

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands. (Stored in RAM). Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 analyzes which command (see FIGS. 13 to 17) is the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S706). In the effect control process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute display control of the effect display device 9.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the normal symbol is 0 (step S 707). If the value of the normal symbol variation time timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S708).

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process which is executed every 2 ms.

  36 to 39 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read out, the value of the read pointer (pointer indicating from which area in the command reception buffer the command should be read out) is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). . Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616A).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 stops the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (the customer waiting demonstration screen) on the effect display device 9 (step S616B). At this point, the customer waiting demo screen may not be displayed, but in this case, the process of step S616B is not performed.

  If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step S 617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is the symbol determination designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). Also, the second symbol variation specification command reception flag is reset. If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S 627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S 628). Also, the first symbol variation specification command reception flag is reset.

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening open designation command (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 sets the special winning opening open flag (step S632). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command in the special opening open opening designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S633). In addition, the microcomputer 100 for effect control recognizes the number of rounds in the big hit game by confirming the large winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can.

  If the received effect control command is a designated command after opening the special winning opening (step S635), the CPU 101 for effect control sets a flag after opening the special winning opening (step S636). Further, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after open designation command in the RAM after the special winning opening after open designated command storage area (step S637).

  If the received effect control command is a low probability / low base state background designation command (step S638), the effect control CPU 101 resets the high base state flag if it is set (step S639). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen of blue display color) according to the low probability / low base state (step S640).

  If the received effect control command is a low probability / high base state background designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability change state flag if it is set, and sets the high base state flag. (Step S642). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen of green display color) according to the low probability / high base state (step S643).

  If the received effect control command is the high probability / low base state background designation command (step S644), the effect control CPU 101 resets the high base state flag and sets the probability change state flag if it is set. (Step S645). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen of yellow display color) according to the high probability / low base state (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S 647), the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change state flag and the high base state flag (step S 648). Further, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen (for example, a background screen of red display color) according to the high probability / high base state (step S649).

  Note that the case where the high probability / low base state background designation command is received in step S644 is the case where the probability variation big hit occurs suddenly and the state is controlled to the high probability / low base state. In this case, the background screen corresponding to the high probability / low base state displayed in step S646 may be a so-called background screen for a latent latency. For example, even if a small hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, whether the sudden change big hit occurs suddenly and is controlled to the high probability state by changing to the background screen for the same probability change latency May be configured to be unrecognizable.

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 performs the first start prize designation command received in the first start prize command formed in the RAM. It stores in the first free storage area of the storage area (step S652). If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S 651), it is stored in the first free storage area of the second start prize command storage area formed in the RAM (step S 652) ).

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the start winning combination command storage area (first start winning combination command storage area, second start winning combination command storage area). As shown in FIG. 40, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value (4 in this example) of the number of pending storages are secured in the start winning combination command storage areas.

  In the process of steps S1219 to S1221 and S1229 to S1231 in the starting opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 25, when there is a starting winning combination to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, 1 timer split In the loading process, the start winning combination designation command (the first start winning combination designation command or the second start winning combination designation command), the symbol designation command and the variation category command are substantially transmitted together as shown in FIG. 40. In each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the start winning command storage area, a storage area is secured such that the start winning designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation category command are stored in association with each other.

  FIG. 40 exemplifies a state in which four start winning designated commands, a symbol specifying command and a variation category command are stored in the respective start winning command storage areas.

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 sets the received symbol designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area. It stores (step S654).

  If the received effect control command is any of the fluctuation category commands (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets the received fluctuation category command to the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area. Store (step S656).

  In the process of steps S654 and S656, if the start winning designation command received immediately before is the first start winning designation command, the effect control CPU 101 performs the symbol designation command and the variation category command at the time of the first start winning. The command is stored in the command storage area, and if the start winning specified command received immediately before is the second start winning specified command, the symbol specifying command and the variation category command are stored in the second start winning time command storage area.

  If the received effect control command is the first pending storage number addition designation command or the second pending storage number addition designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 determines the value of the first pending storage number counter or the second The value of the pending storage number counter is incremented by 1 (step S658). Further, the effect control CPU 101 displays the first number of pending storages in the first pending storage display unit 18c (when the first pending storage number addition specification command is received), or the second pending in the second pending storage display unit 18d. The display of the storage number (when the second suspension storage number addition designation command is received) is updated (step S659). Specifically, the number of displays is increased by one. The first pending storage number counter and the second pending storage number counter are formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is a wait for customer demonstration specification command (step S668), the effect control CPU 101 starts displaying a wait for customer demonstration screen predetermined on the effect display device 9 (step S669). .

  If the received effect control command is a normal symbol variation start designation command (step S 671), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received normal symbol variation start designation command in the normal symbol variation start designation command provided in the RAM. It stores in the area (step S672). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag (step S 673) and also sets the normal symbol variation in progress flag indicating that the normal symbol variation display is in progress (step S 674).

  In step S 673, when the CPU 101 for effect control has received the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command, the normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, and the normal symbol variation start designation (displacement) command is When it is received, the normal symbol fluctuation start designation (off) command reception flag is set.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the normal symbol fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (step S 675).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the low base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, and when the gaming state is the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.5 seconds. However, in step S675, a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the normal symbol variation time timer uniformly regardless of the gaming state. Even if a value equivalent to 10 seconds is uniformly set, in this embodiment, control is performed so that predetermined effects to be described later are not performed when in the high base state, so that problems occur in the execution of predetermined effects. There is no. In the high base state, the normal symbol variation time timer value is reset by receiving the normal symbol variation end designation command when the variation display of the normal symbol is finished after 1.5 seconds. (See step S677). In step S 675, it is confirmed whether or not the high base state (specifically, whether or not the high base state flag is set), and only when the high base state is not normal symbol variation time timer A value corresponding to 10 seconds may be set, and in the high base state, a value corresponding to 1.5 seconds may be set to the normal symbol variation time timer.

  If the received effect control command is a normal symbol variation end designation command (step S676), the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation flag and resets the normal symbol variation time timer (step S677). .

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S690). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory drawing showing the random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, the random number SR3 for determining a predetermined effect, and the background effect. A random number SR4 for determination and a random number SR6 for preliminary announcement notice effect determination are used. In addition, you may use random numbers other than these, in order to improve a rendering effect.

  The first to third final stop symbol determination random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 are "stop" in the display area of the effect display device 9 as a stop symbol which is a variable display result of the decorative symbol, "middle", " It is a random number used to determine the decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in each symbol display area on the right. The final stop symbols are three decorative symbols that are finally displayed in stop in the symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right" when variable display of the decorative symbols is finished. In addition, the combination of the big hit symbols of decorative symbols is determined by any one of the random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols.

  The predetermined effect determination random number SR3 is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the predetermined effect.

  The background rendering determination random number SR4 is a random number for determining whether to execute the background rendering.

  The random number SR6 for prefetch advance notice effect determination is a random number for deciding whether or not to execute preview advance notice effect.

  FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a first predetermined effect process (step S810A), a second predetermined effect process (step S810B), and a preview advance notice effect determination process (step S810C).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of the processes in steps S800 to S807 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and variable display of the decorative symbol is realized, but control regarding variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second The control regarding the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. Even if the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the second special symbol are configured to be executed by another effect control process process Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which of the special symbols is displayed depending on which effect control process process is used to display the variation of the decorative symbols.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a fluctuation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decoration variation start process (step S801).

  Ornamental symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornamental symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change processing (step S802).

  Ornamental symbol variation processing (step S802): The switching timing and the like of each variation state (variation rate) constituting the variation pattern is controlled, and the end of the variation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time is over, the value of the effect control process flag is displayed and updated to a value corresponding to the symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803).

  Decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and deriving and displaying the display result (stop symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of a big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  In-round process (step S 805): Display control in the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post round process (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Perform display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S 807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory view of an example of an execution section of a predetermined effect. The "predetermined effect" is controlled whether the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol or the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state (for example, an open state) where the game ball easily enters (passes) It is an effect to inform whether or not it is done. Moreover, in this embodiment, it may be notified that a predetermined type of hit (for example, a small hit) will be made in the predetermined effect. In this embodiment, in a predetermined effect, an effect of an aspect in which the roulette is rotated on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is executed. In the predetermined effect, it is not necessary to notify that 100% reach effect is executed, or to notify that the 100% variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters. A notification may be given that suggests the possibility that the effect will be executed, or a notification that suggests that the variable winning ball device 15 may be controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters. The predetermined effect is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, the predetermined effect is executed in the order of the indication effect, the start effect, the informing effect, and the informing effect. A period in which the indication effect is performed is referred to as a first period, and a period in which the start effect, the informing effect, and the result informing effect are performed is referred to as a second period.

  In addition, the execution of the first period (prediction effect) may be omitted. In addition, the period of the result notification effect may be shortened.

  The indication effect is an effect that reminds the player that the predetermined effect is started. The start effect is an effect for causing the player to recognize that the predetermined effect has been started. The informing effect is such an effect that the player is expected to be controlled to a state in which the variable winning ball device 15 can easily enter the game ball. The result notification effect can be recalled as to whether or not the player is controlled to a state where the variable winning ball device 15 can easily enter the game ball.

  In addition, it is desirable that the indication is performed in the first period and the case not to be developed after the start effect in the second period (in this example, the effect of roulette) after the execution in the second period. In such a case, by performing the indication effect, not only the expectation that the effect such as roulette may be performed but also the uneasiness that it may not necessarily develop to the effect such as roulette Can improve the effect of the indication effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described later, when the presence or the type of the predetermined effect is determined with the start of the variable display of the normal symbol as a trigger and the predetermined effect is executed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol There is a case where the presence or absence and the type of the predetermined effect are determined with the start of the event, and the predetermined effect is executed. Hereinafter, in this embodiment, the predetermined effect performed and executed with the start of the variation display of the normal symbol is referred to as the "first predetermined effect", and the start of the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol There is a case where a predetermined effect to be performed and executed as a trigger is referred to as a "second predetermined effect".

  44 to 46 are explanatory views showing an example of the predetermined effect. In addition, the effect for alerting | reporting that the variable winning a prize ball apparatus 15 is controlled by the state which a game ball easily enters is illustrated by FIG. Further, FIG. 45 exemplifies an effect for notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) is to be made. Further, FIG. 46 exemplifies an effect for notifying that reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A) to FIG. 46 (A), the variation of the decorative symbol is started from the state in which the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbol on the left middle right is stopped in the effect display device 9 ( Refer FIG. 44 (B)-FIG. 46 (B). At that time, display control is performed such that the character image 9a displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 moves. The effect by such display control corresponds to the predictive effect.

  Next, control for displaying a notification image (for example, an image for displaying a "roulette chance") 9b which is an image for an effect as if a predetermined effect is started is executed (FIG. 44 (C) to FIG. 46 (C)). The effect by such display control corresponds to the start effect. Then, the effect for notification is started.

  In this embodiment, the informing effect is an effect such that the symbol changes in the effect area 9F (effect in an aspect in which the roulette rotates) (see FIG. 44D to FIG. 46D).

  Thereafter, if it is reported that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters, in the effect area 9F, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters The image 9c indicating that is displayed stopped (see FIG. 44E). Next, a notification image 9d is displayed to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 44 (F)). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9e that clearly indicates that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in a state (open state) where the game ball can easily enter (see FIG. 44 (F)). A period in which display control as shown in FIGS. 44E and 44F is performed corresponds to a period for effect notification effect.

  In addition, in the case of notifying that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit), it is suggested that a predetermined type of hit (in this example, a small hit) in presentation area 9F The image 9 f is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 45E). Next, a notification image 9g is displayed to notify the user of the occurrence of a predetermined type of hit (see FIG. 45F). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9h that clearly indicates that the special winning opening is controlled to a state (open state) where the game ball easily enters (see FIG. 45F).

  In addition, if it is a notification that reach effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect) is to be performed, an image that suggests reaching in the effect area 9F (in order to notify that the expectation of the big hit is high) (Image of 9) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 46E). In the example shown in FIG. 46, an image including the character string of "superheat" is shown as the image 9i that suggests reaching, but in this embodiment, an image that suggests reaching As, there are two, an image containing the string of "superheat" and an image containing the string of "chance". And in this embodiment, when it becomes super reach, compared with the case where it becomes normal reach, the image containing the character string of "superheat" rather than the image containing the character string of "chance" is stopped and displayed. Rate is high. Then, the display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state (see FIG. 46F). Thereafter, the effect display device 9 displays an image 9 j which clearly indicates the occurrence of super reach (see FIG. 46F).

  In addition, the effect mode of the predetermined effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and for example, the reach effect is executed or the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes) A predetermined effect (that is, “false” is notified that reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes) before notifying The "predetermined effect" may be executed.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view showing a specific example in the case where a predetermined effect for notifying a notification result of an outing is performed before notifying that a reach effect is performed, as another example of the predetermined effect. In the other example shown in FIG. 47, once in the effect area 9F, reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball device 15 is also not controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss) The image 9k to be displayed is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 47E). Next, for the effect for notification, the variation of the symbol is started in the effect area 9F, and the effect such that the effect for notification is started again is executed (see FIG. 47 (F)). After that, in the effect area 9F, an image (image for informing that the expectation of the big hit is high) 9i is suggested to be stopped (see FIG. 47 (G)).

  48 to 50 are flowcharts showing the first predetermined effect process (step S810A). In the first predetermined effect process, a predetermined effect is started when a predetermined condition is satisfied triggered by the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

  In the first predetermined effect process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether a first predetermined effect in-progress flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is being executed is set (step S731). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether a second predetermined effect executing flag indicating that the second predetermined effect is being executed is set ( Step S732). If the second predetermined effect executing flag is set, the process ends. If the second predetermined effect in-progress flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S741.

  When the first predetermined effect executing flag is set in step S731 (that is, when the first predetermined effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 101 measures the effect period of the first predetermined effect. The value of the first predetermined effect timer for doing this is decremented by one (step S734). When the value of the first predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S735), the first predetermined effect is ended (step S736). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the flag under execution of the first predetermined effect (step S737).

  In step S741, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the flag with the next change (a flag indicating that the first predetermined effect is determined to be executed during the change of the special symbol and the decorative symbol to be started next). Check if it is. If the next variation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S761.

  If the next variation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 operates a non-variation period measurement timer (a timer for measuring a period during which variation (variable display) of special symbols and decorative symbols is not started). It is confirmed whether it is (not 0) (step S742). If the non-variable period measurement timer is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S751. In addition, since the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol are synchronized with each other, hereinafter, the variation of the special symbol will be described as an example.

  When the non-variation period measurement timer is in operation, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started (step S743). Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process or the decorative symbol variation process. If the variation of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If the variation of the special symbol is not started, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the non-variation period measurement timer by 1 (step S744). Then, when the value of the non-variation period measurement timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S771 (step S745). If the value of the non-fluctuation period measurement timer is not 0, the process ends.

  In step S 751, the CPU for effect control 101 receives a normal symbol fluctuation start designation command (indicating that a normal symbol fluctuation start designation command (a normal symbol fluctuation start designation (hit) command or a normal symbol fluctuation start designation (disengagement) command) has been received). It is checked whether a flag (normal symbol variation start designation (hit) command reception flag or a normal symbol variation start designation (drop) command reception flag) is set. If it is not set, the process ends.

  If the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether it is in the high base state (whether the high base state flag is set) (step S752) . If it is in the high base state, the process ends.

  If it is not in the high base state, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (including a small hit gaming state) (step S753). Whether or not the jackpot gaming state, for example, is confirmed by the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is in the jackpot gaming state, the process ends.

  If the jackpot gaming state is not, the CPU for effect control 101 stores a symbol designating command (symbol 6 designating command: see FIG. 15) corresponding to a small hit in the start winning winning time storage area (see FIG. 40). (Step S754). If the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit is stored, the process is ended.

  When the symbol specifying command corresponding to the small hit is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol is in the process of change (step S755). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change processing or the decorative symbol change stop processing. If the special symbol is not changing, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether one minute or more has elapsed since the ending of the special symbol change (step S757).

  In addition, for example, the timer for measuring the time after the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol is prepared, and the determination process of step S757 is implement | achieved by confirming the measured value of the timer. If one minute or more has passed since the end of the variation of the special symbol, the processing is ended. If the time since the end of the special symbol variation is less than one minute, the process proceeds to step S759.

  In addition, when one minute or more has passed since the end of the change of the special symbol, the process is considered to be continued for a while after the end of the change of the special symbol. It is for. That is, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the low base state is 10 seconds (refer to FIG. 19), and the upper limit value of the number of gate passing memories (the number of ordinary symbols reserved) is 4. It is considered preferable to execute the process of step S759 until a time slightly more than 10 seconds has elapsed.

  Further, in this embodiment, step S 759 is executed when the step S 752 is N, and the first predetermined effect may be executed. Therefore, in the low base state, the variable winning ball device 15 performs the first predetermined effect. The notification means is realized to notify that the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the open state when it is in the open state. Then, by executing steps S755 and S757, if one minute or more has elapsed since the end of the last special symbol variation display, notification that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is limited. Ru. In this embodiment, if one minute or more has passed since the end of the variation display of the last special symbol, the customer waiting demonstration display after the end of the variation display of the last special symbol is also ended. Do. Therefore, in this embodiment, by executing steps S755 and S757, notification limiting means is realized which limits the notification by the notification means after the end of the customer waiting demonstration display.

  If the special symbol is being changed, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (11.5 in this example) has elapsed from the start of the change (step S758). If the predetermined time has elapsed, the process ends.

  In this embodiment, when the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbol is executed according to the variation pattern in which the super reach effect is to be executed, the super reach effect is started 11.5 seconds after the start of the variation.

  If the predetermined time has not elapsed, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence and the type of the first predetermined effect (step S759). Then, the process proceeds to step S764. Note that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation is determined, for example, by the value of the fluctuation time timer (see FIGS. 58 and 63).

  In step S759, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the first predetermined effect (which notification result is to be used), for example, using the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG.

  In the first predetermined effect determination table shown in FIG. 51, when the display result of the normal symbol is an out symbol (corresponding to when the normal symbol fluctuation start designation (off) command reception flag is set) and the display of the normal symbol A judgment value corresponding to not performing a predetermined effect and a predetermined effect according to each of the cases in which the result is hit and the symbol is set (corresponding to when the symbol change start designation (hit) command reception flag is set). A determination value corresponding to performing (x), a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (o), and a determination corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (o) after a predetermined effect (x) A value is set. The predetermined effect (x) is a predetermined effect for notifying that the reach effect is not executed and the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to a state where the game ball easily enters (passes) (notice result of loss), The predetermined effect (○) is a predetermined effect notifying that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to a state in which the game ball easily enters (passes). In addition, the determination value corresponding to performing at least the predetermined effect may be set in the first predetermined effect determination table. Further, FIG. 51 shows not the determination values themselves but the number of determination values.

  In addition, in addition to the aspect of the "information content" shown in FIG. 51 instead of the aspect of the "information content" (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 51, another aspect may be used. For example, an image in the form of a card lamp (red light for emergency) generally used for definite variation confirmation notification, a character image used in step-up notice effect for giving notice of a display result of a special symbol, or a big hit notification You may use the image for etc. as another aspect. In the case of using them, an effect in which a certain variation confirmation notification, a step-up notice effect, a big hit notification etc. and a predetermined effect are linked is realized.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51, even when it is per common drawing, it is configured such that the predetermined effect may not be executed at a low rate of 10% even when it is per common distribution. The predetermined effect may be performed at a rate of 100%.

  In the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the predetermined effect determination random number (see FIG. 41), and the predetermined effect determination random number matches any of the determination values corresponding to the execution of the predetermined effect. , It is decided to execute a predetermined effect. In addition, CPU101 for production control, when the normal design fluctuation start designated (deterioration) command reception flag is set, uses the decision value regarding “normal design off” in the 1st specified production decision table, normal design fluctuation When the start designation (hit) command reception flag is set, the determination value relating to "per normal symbol" in the first predetermined effect determination table is used. In addition, it is determined whether it is per common drawing by confirming the normal design fluctuation start specification command stored in the normal design fluctuation start specification command storage area (see step S672), and if per common drawing, " It is also possible to use the determination value related to "normal symbol" and use the determination value related to "ordinary symbol off" if not per common drawing.

  Further, when executing the process of step S759, the effect control CPU 101 resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 101 also resets the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag when the normal symbol variation start designation command reception flag is set even when it is determined as “Y” in step S733. Further, the CPU 101 for effect control also sets the normal symbol variation start designation command which is set even when the process does not shift to the process of step S759 because it is determined as "Y" in steps S752, S753, S754, S757, S758. Reset the reception flag.

  In step S761, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started. Whether or not the variation of the special symbol is started is determined, for example, by the value of the effect control process flag. If the variation of the special symbol is not started, the value of the effect shortening timer (timer for determining the degree of shortening of the effect period of the predetermined effect) is incremented by 1 (step S762). If the variation of the special symbol is started, the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S764, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the first predetermined effect. In the process of step S759, it is decided to execute the first predetermined effect. If it is not determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the process ends.

  If it is determined to execute the first predetermined effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S765). Whether or not the special symbol is changing is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol change processing or the decorative symbol change stop processing. If the special symbol is not changing, the process proceeds to step S770. If the special symbol is being changed, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the change pattern is out of reach or not (step S766). When the fluctuation pattern includes reach effect, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If the fluctuation pattern is not falling out of reach, the effect control CPU 101 normally determines the remaining time of fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, specified by the value of the fluctuation time timer shown in FIGS. 58 and 63). It is checked whether or not it is shorter than the fluctuation time of the symbol (for example, 10 seconds: equivalent to a period until the variable winning ball device is controlled to easily enter the gaming ball) (step S767). If not short, the process proceeds to step S771. The effect control CPU 101 may check whether the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation time of the normal symbol.

  If the remaining time of the variation of the special symbol is short, the CPU for effect control 101 has a pending storage (at least the value of the first pending storage number counter or the value of the second pending storage number counter is not 0) It is confirmed whether or not (step S768). If there is no pending storage, the process proceeds to step S771.

  If there is a pending storage, the effect control CPU 101 sets the next variation present flag (step S769).

  In step S 770, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) to the non-variation period measurement timer.

  In step S771, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the next variation flag is set. If the next variation flag is set, a predetermined effect pattern is selected according to the value of the effect shortening timer (see steps S741, S761 and S762) (step S772). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined as a pattern having a period obtained by subtracting the value of the effect shortening timer from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. 43 as the effect period. The period to be shortened is the period of the result notification effect shown in FIG.

  If the next change presence flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the value of the non-change period measurement timer (see steps S742, S743 and S744) is 0 (step S773). . If the value of the non-variation period measurement timer is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern according to the value of the non-variation period measurement timer (step S774). Specifically, the pattern of the predetermined effect is determined to be a pattern having an effect period that is a period obtained by subtracting the value of the timer for measurement of non-variation period from the period of the predetermined effect shown in FIG. In addition, the period shortened is a period of the result alerting | reporting presentation shown by FIG.

  When the value of the non-variation period measurement timer is 0 (the non-variation period measurement timer has timed out), the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not the special symbol is being varied (step S775). ). If the special symbol is being changed, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern to be started from the second period (see FIG. 43) (step S776). If the special symbol is not changing, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern to be started from the first period (see FIG. 43) (step S777).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the time according to the determined predetermined effect pattern to the first predetermined effect timer (step S778). Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the first predetermined effect (step S779) and sets the first predetermined effect executing flag (step S780).

  In addition, when setting the flag during execution of the first predetermined effect, information which can also specify the notification result of the first predetermined effect is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the notification result is "x", a flag indicating that the notification result is "o", and indicating that a predetermined effect (o) is to be executed after the predetermined effect (x) A flag may be set. Also, for example, when the first predetermined effect executing flag is configured by a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value specifying which notification result is to be a predetermined bit of the first predetermined effect executing flag By setting, it may be possible to specify which notification result is obtained.

  In this embodiment, specifically, the first predetermined effect is realized by executing effect control in accordance with data set in a process table to be described later. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the determined predetermined effect pattern in the process of step S779, and uses the data set in the selected process table to display the effect display 9 Start display control etc. Each process table is stored in advance in the ROM.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the second predetermined effect process (step S810B). In the second predetermined effect pre-reading process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a new variation category command has been received (step S5201). When a new change category command is received, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not the first predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5202). If the first predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S5203). If the second predetermined effect executing flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a second predetermined effect determining flag indicating that the execution of the second predetermined effect is determined is set. (Step S5204).

  If the second predetermined effect determination flag is not set either, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the next variation present flag is set (step S5205). If the next variation flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the non-variation period measurement timer is in operation (not 0) (step S5206).

  If the non-variation period measurement timer is not in operation, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the gaming state data is in the high base state (step S5207). If it is in the high base state, the process ends.

  If it is not in the high base state, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not it is a big hit gaming state (including a small hit gaming state) (step S5208). Whether or not the jackpot gaming state, for example, is confirmed by the value of the effect control process flag. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 is in the big hit gaming state when the value of the effect control process flag is 4 or more. If it is in the jackpot gaming state, the process ends.

  If it is not the jackpot gaming state, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the newly received fluctuation category command indicates the judgment result of the super reach loss or the super reach jackpot (step S5209). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation category 8 command, the variation category 10 command, the variation category 12 command, the variation category 23 command or the variation category 26 command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) are received.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines a winning result at the time of winning (super reach lost or super reach big hit) and the total number of pending storages (the second predetermined effect determining table for determining the presence and type of the second predetermined effect). A predetermined effect determination table corresponding to the sum of the number of 1 pending storage and the number of the second pending storage is selected (step S5210).

  Further, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the second predetermined effect using the second predetermined effect determination table selected in the process of step S5210 (step S5211).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing a second predetermined effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, in the second predetermined effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not performing a predetermined effect in association with the winning determination result and the total number of pending storages, and a predetermined effect A determination value corresponding to performing (x), a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (chance), and a determination value corresponding to performing a predetermined effect (superheat) are set. There is.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the predetermined effect (superheat) with the highest expectation for reach effect is achieved as compared to the case of a super reach loss. The rate is determined at a high rate, and the execution rate of the predetermined effect (superheat) increases as the total number of pending storages increases.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the second predetermined effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a second predetermined effect determination flag (steps S5213, S5214).

  When the second predetermined effect determination flag is set, information that can also specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is stored in the RAM. As an example, a flag indicating that the notification result is "x", a flag indicating that the notification result is "chance", and a flag indicating that the notification result is "excessive heat" are set. Also, for example, when the second predetermined effect determination flag is configured with a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value specifying which notification result is to be specified is set to the predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect determination flag By doing this, it may be possible to identify which notification result.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets the total number of pending storages in the first variation frequency counter (step S5215). The first fluctuation number counter is a counter for counting the number of fluctuation displays to be executed until the fluctuation display including the second predetermined effect is started. In this embodiment, when the determination of the execution of the second predetermined effect is performed during the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the first change number counter is set in step S5215, the execution is first performed The value of the first variation count counter is decremented by 1 at the end of the middle variation display (see step S8312), and as a result, the first variation count counter is displayed up to the previous variation display of the variation display including the second predetermined effect. The value is 0. In step S5215, when the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current total number of pending storages in the first variation number counter. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the value of the first variation count counter equal to 0 by all means up to the next variable display before the variable display including the second predetermined effect.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing pre-reading advance notice effect determination processing (step S810C). In the pre-reading advance notice effect determination processing, the CPU for effect control 101 checks whether or not a command (design designation command, variation category command, start winning designation command) at the time of new start winning is received (step S6001). More specifically, whether a new start winning command has been received or not is determined by storing a new command in the first start winning command storage area or the second start winning command storage area (see FIG. 40). It can be determined by checking whether it has been done or not. If a new start winning command has not been received, the processing ends.

  If a command at the time of new start winning is received, CPU101 for production control CPU pre-reading announcement decision flag which shows that execution of pre-reading advance announcement production is decided, or pre-reading announcement which shows that pre-reading announcement production is under execution It is checked whether the in-execution flag is set (step S6002). If the pre-reading advance notice determination flag or the pre-reading advance notice execution flag is set, the processing is ended as it is. By executing the process of step S6002, in this embodiment, if the prefetch advance notice effect has already been determined or if the prefetch advance notice effect is being executed, the decision process of the prefetch advance notice effect is repeated. I do not try to do it. In addition, when the pre-reading advance notice effect has been determined or being executed for the pending storage for which the winning determination result is lost (that is, when the so-called pre-reading advance notice effect of so-called has been determined or being executed) If the pending storage generated in the is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S6003 and subsequent processes may be performed to determine the advance notice effect, and replace the determined or in-progress advance notice effect.

  If neither the pre-reading notice determination flag nor the pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the probability change state flag or the high base flag is set (step S6003). If the probability change state flag or the high base flag is set, the process ends. By executing the process of step S6003, in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step S6004 and subsequent steps only when the gaming state is the low probability / low base state, and it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect.

  If neither the probability change status flag nor the high base status flag is set (that is, in the case of the low probability / low base status), the effect control CPU 56 determines that the newly received start winning specification command is the first start winning specification. It is confirmed whether it is a command (step S6004). Whether or not the newly received start winning designation command is the first start winning designation command is, specifically, whether the first start winning designation command was newly stored in the first start winning command storage area. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If the command is not the first start prize designation command (that is, if it is the second start prize designation command), the process ends. By executing the process of step S6004, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect with only the first hold storage as the notice target. In addition to the first hold storage, the second hold storage may be configured to be able to execute the advance notice effect as the notice target.

  If the newly received start winning designation command is a first start winning designation command, a prefetch notice effect determination table for determining presence / absence of prefetch notice effect according to the win determination result and the current first pending storage number Is selected (step S6005). Then, the CPU for effect control 101 performs the lottery process based on the selected advance notice effect determination table and the random number SR6 for advance notice effect determination, and determines whether to execute the advance notice effect (step S6006). Specifically, the random number SR6 for prefetch advance notice effect determination is extracted, and whether or not to execute the advance notice advance effect according to the determination value (decision value set in the prefetch advance notice effect decision table) matching the random value decide.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory view of a pre-reading notice effect determination table. In the pre-read advance notice effect determination table, a determination value corresponding to not performing pre-read advance notice effect and a determination value corresponding to execution of pre-read advance notice effect are set. Alternatively, one of the determination value corresponding to not performing the advance notice generation for preview advance and the determination value corresponding to execution of the advance notice announcement effect may be set in the advance notice generation determination table.

  In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 first specifies, based on the newly received symbol designating command, whether the prize determination result is “off”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. Specifically, if the symbol designating command newly stored in the first start winning command storing area is the symbol 1 designating command, it is determined that the winning determination result is “off”, and it is the symbol 2 designating command. For example, it is specified that the winning determination result is "normal big hit", and if the symbol 3 designated command is specified, the winning determination result is specified as "probable variation big hit". In this embodiment, when the determination result at the time of winning is "suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit", it is decided not to execute pre-reading advance notice effect as it is, and the processing is ended. In addition, even if the determination result at the time of winning is “a sudden definite big hit” or “a small hit”, it may be configured to be able to execute preview advance notice effects.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the current first pending storage number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 identifies the current first pending storage number by confirming the value of the first pending storage number counter (see step S658). Then, the effect control CPU 101 selects a table corresponding to the specified determination result at the time of winning and the first reserved storage number from the advance notice advance effect determination table shown in FIG. 55, and based on the advance notice advance effect determination random number SR6. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute preview advance notice effects.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, when the determination result at the time of winning is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the prefetching is performed as compared with the case where the determination result at winning is “off”. The execution rate of the preliminary production has become high. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit can be enhanced by executing the advance notice effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the winning determination result is “probable big hit”, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the winning determination result is “usually big hit”. It has become. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the advance notice announcement effect, it is possible to further enhance the expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, when the determination result at the time of winning is “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the advance previewing effect is executed as the number of first reserved memory increases. When the ratio is high and the winning determination result is “losing”, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect is smaller as the number of first reserved storage numbers increases. In this embodiment, in the case of executing the advance notice advance effect, after the start winning prize of the pending storage of the notice object occurs, the execution of the advance notice effect is started from the first variable display, and the notice object The previewing notice effect is continued until the previous variable display of the variable display for the pending storage of. Therefore, when the first number of pending storages is 2, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in 1 change before the change display of the previous notice, and when the first number of pending storages is 3, the variation of the previous notices The prefetch advance notice effect is executed over 2 variations before the display, and when the first number of pending storages is 4, the prefetch notice effect is executed over 3 variations before the fluctuation display of the notice object (first reserve memory If the number is one, there is no one change before the change display for the pending storage of the advance notice object, so no advance notice effect is executed). Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit becomes higher as the number of times of execution of the advance preview notice effect increases, and the degree of expectation for the “probable variation big hit” becomes higher as the number of times of execution of the advance preview effect is increased.

  Note that "pre-read advance notice effect" is a notice effect performed prior to the start of the variable display to be the advance notice target. In this embodiment, the effect is started from the variable display started after the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be notified, and one or more times to the previous variable display to be changed. In the variable display of the pre-read advance notice effect is executed, but not limited to such an aspect, the pre-read advance notice effect is executed only in any one time of the variable display before the change display to be a notice target It is also good. Further, in this embodiment, the advance notice effect is ended up to the variable display immediately before the variable display to be the advance notice target, but the preview advance notice effect may be performed across the change display to be the advance notice target. Further, it is not necessary to continuously execute over a plurality of variable displays, and for example, the preview advance notice effect may be performed in a plurality of variable displays intermittently every other time or every second time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case is described where the advance notice of the advance notice effect is started from the first variable display started after the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be notified in advance. The start timing of the preview advance notice effect may be adjusted, such as starting the preview advance notice effect from the second change display or the third change display that is started after the occurrence of. In this case, for example, the start timing of the pre-reading advance notice effect is adjusted depending on whether it is “probable variation big hit”, “normally big hit” or “off”, and the execution period of pre-reading advance notice effect is adjusted. You may Specifically, for example, when the prefetching preview effect is executed with the fourth eye pending storage as the alerting target, the execution timing of the prefetching advance effect is determined according to the winning determination result of the fourth stage pending storage. You may do so. Then, for example, in the case of a big hit (“probable big hit” or “normal big hit”), by deciding the early timing as the execution timing of the advance notice effect, the longer the execution period of the advance notice effect, the larger hit The expectation for may be increased.

  If the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the advance notice effect (step S6007), the process ends.

  If it is determined to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-reading advance notice determination flag (step S6008).

  Also, the effect control CPU 101 sets the current first pending storage number in the second variation number counter (step S6009).

  The second fluctuation number counter is a counter for counting the number of fluctuation displays to be executed before the fluctuation display, which is the determination target of the previewed advance presentation effect, is started. In this embodiment, when the determination of the execution of the advance notice effect is made during the change display of the decorative symbol and the second change number counter is set in the process of step S6009, first, the change display during the execution is performed At the end of the second variation counter value is decremented by 1 (see step S8322), and as a result, the second variation number counter value is 1 It becomes 0 and the period which does not perform judgment of pre-reading advance announcement production ends.

  In the process of step S6009, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is not being performed, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current first pending storage number in the second variation number counter. Is desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to end the period in which the pre-read advance notice effect is not determined up to the next variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning determination.

  FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decoration variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are flowcharts showing decorative symbol variation start processing (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the first pending storage number counter or the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (step S8000). Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the display of the first number of pending storages in the first pending storage display unit 18c or the display of the second pending storage number in the second pending storage display unit 18d (step S8001). Specifically, the number of displays is reduced by one. When the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the first hold storage number counter by one, and the first hold storage in the first hold storage display unit 18c. Reduce the number display by one. Also, when the second symbol variation specification command reception flag is set, the value of the second holding storage number counter is decremented by one, and the display of the second holding storage number in the second holding storage display unit 18d is reduced by 1 .

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is set (step S8005). If the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S8022. If the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is not set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the pre-reading notice determination flag is set (step S8006). If the pre-reading notice determination flag is set (that is, if pre-reading notice effect has been determined), the effect control CPU 101 causes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to be a background according to the high probability / high base state The screen is changed to a background screen similar to the screen (for example, a background screen of a red display color) (step S8007), and execution of the preview advance notice effect is started. Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the pre-reading advance notice determination flag, and resets the pre-reading advance notice executing flag (step S8008).

  In this embodiment, although a case of performing an effect of changing to a background screen similar to the high probability / high base state as the advance notice advance effect is shown, the effect mode of the advance announcement notice effect is the execution of this embodiment. It is not limited to what is shown in the form. For example, by performing the same effect as the effect performed in the high probability / high base state, or by displaying the same character or item as the character or item displayed in the high probability / high base state, the prefetch advance notice effect May be performed.

  If the pre-reading advance notice determination flag is not set (that is, if the pre-reading advance notice effect is not also determined), the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether the probability change state flag or the high base state flag is set Step S8009). If the probability change state flag or the high base state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8022.

  If neither the probability change status flag nor the high base status flag is set (that is, in the case of the low probability / low base status), the effect control CPU 101 causes the variation started this time to be the variation display of the first special symbol. It is checked whether there is any (step S8010). In addition, specifically, it can be determined by checking whether the 1st design change specification command was received whether it is the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol. If it is not the case to start the variation display of the first special symbol (that is, if it is the case to receive the second symbol variation specification command and start the variation display of the second special symbol), the CPU 101 for effect control displays an effect The background screen displayed on the device 9 is changed to a background screen similar to the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, a background screen of red display color) (step S8011), and the background screen is changed Start executing background rendering. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a background effect executing flag indicating that the background effect is being executed (step S8012).

  If variable display of the first special symbol is to be started, the CPU for effect control 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the background effect determination table for determining the presence / absence of the background effect, and executes the background effect It is determined whether or not (step S8013).

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory view of a background effect determination table. In the background rendering determination table, determination values corresponding to not performing background rendering and determination values corresponding to performing background rendering are set. Note that either the determination value corresponding to not performing the background effect or the determination value corresponding to performing the background effect may be set in the background effect determination table.

  In step S8013, the effect control CPU 101 first specifies whether the display result of the variable display to be started this time is “off”, “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”. Specifically, if the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command, the display result is identified as "off", and if the display result 2 designation command is displayed The result is identified as "normal big hit", and if the display result 3 designated command, the display result is identified as "probable big hit". In this embodiment, when the display result is "Suddenly probability variation big hit" or "small hit", it is decided not to execute the background effect as it is. In addition, even if the display result is "a sudden definite big hit" or "a small hit", the background effect may be executable. Then, the effect control CPU 101 selects a table corresponding to the specified display result from the background effect determination table shown in FIG. 59, performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines whether or not to execute the background effect.

  As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, the allocation of the determination values of the background rendering determination table is performed when the first number of pending storages in the prefetching preview rendering determination table shown in FIG. It is the same as the allocation of the judgment value in the case where the preview effect is executed by one change). Therefore, in this embodiment, the same effect mode (effect of changing to the background screen similar to the high probability / high base state) is performed in the same manner as the previewed preview effect and the background effect. When the rendition is executed, the expectation for the big hit is higher than when the background rendition of only one change is executed, and the expectation for the positive variation is also higher.

  When it is determined to execute the background effect (step S8014), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as the background screen similar to the background screen according to the high probability / high base state For example, it is changed to a background screen of red display color) (step S8015), and execution of background rendering is started. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a background effect in progress flag indicating that the background effect is being executed (step S8016).

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / high base state, the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, a background screen of red display color) is changed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the state controlled to the high probability / high base state and changed to the background screen according to the high probability / high base state corresponds to the state controlled to the special rendering state. Further, in this embodiment, even when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability / low base state, the previewing preview effect and the background effect are executed, and the background screen similar to the high probability / high base state ( For example, there may be a case where a background screen of red display color is changed, and the state in which the pre-reading preview effect and the background effect are being executed corresponds to the state in which the special effect is being executed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the special effect is executed for the first period (when the advance notice effect of only one change is executed or when the background effect is performed), the second period is executed which is longer than the first period. When you do (when you perform preview advance notice effect over multiple changes), when you perform the special effect for the second period is the expectation (reliability) for the big hit than when the special effect is performed for the first period Also, the degree of expectation (reliability) for becoming a probability change big hit (ie, the longer the special rendition stage is extended, the expectation for reliability (reliability) for a big hit, the expectation degree (reliability) for becoming a probability change big hit Is high).

  Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S8009 to S8012, the special effect is executed when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the gaming state is the low probability / low base state. It is possible. The fact that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when in the low probability / low base state means that the 5.8 seconds long opening of the variable winning ball device 15 (see FIG. 19) is being performed. Since the start winning on the second start winning opening 14 occurs and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the process of steps S8009 to S8012 enables the variable winning ball device 15 to operate for 5.8 seconds. In the variable display executed based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 when in the long-term open state, the special effect can be executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when controlled to the low probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game based on the big hit, when the variable display of 100 times is finished, the low probability / high base state to low probability / low base / Transition to the low base state. Then, when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened immediately before the end of the low probability / high base state (in this case, the open state for 1.8 seconds is performed three times because of the high base state) (see FIG. 19). If the second start winning opening 14 is start winning in the three 1.8 seconds of opening, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning is low immediately after the end of the low probability / high base state It may be implemented in probability / low base state. Therefore, if it is immediately after ending the low probability / high base state, for example, the second special symbol in the low probability / low base state until the predetermined number of fluctuation display ends (for example, until 4 fluctuation ends) It is desirable to be configured not to execute the special effect even when the variable display of is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state in the low base state, the case where the open state is uniformly 5.8 seconds is shown, The open time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the low base state may be plural (e.g., 5.8 seconds and 0.1 seconds). In this case, for example, when the winning of the second start winning opening 14 occurs during opening for 5.8 seconds, or when the winning of the second starting winning opening 14 occurs during opening of 0.1 seconds. If it is possible to transmit a command that can identify if the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the open for a long time of 5.8 seconds, the second special symbol variation display is executed It may be configured to execute background rendering only.

  In this embodiment, in steps S8007, S8011 and S8015, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is completely the same as the background screen corresponding to the high probability / high base state (for example, red display color The case of performing special effects by changing to background screen) is shown, but it is not limited to the case of executing exactly the same effects, special effects may be partially shared with the effects during high probability / high base state It may be executed as In this case, for example, only the effect of outputting the same effect sound from the speaker 27 as when being controlled to the high probability / high base state is executed, or the same light emission pattern as when being controlled to the high probability / high base state Only the effect of lighting or blinking the LED / lamp may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads a fluctuation pattern command from the fluctuation pattern command storage area (step S8022). Further, the effect control CPU 101 reads out the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step S8023). Then, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol according to the read variation pattern command and the display result designation command (step S8024). Then, the determined stop symbol is stored in the RAM (step S8025).

  In addition, when pseudo run is designated by the change pattern command, the CPU 101 for effect control, as the temporary stop symbol of the pseudo run in step S8024, the chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445" Also, although it is not a reach, a combination of a big hit symbol and a symbol whose one symbol is off is also determined. In addition, in the process of step S8024, the CPU for effect control 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. It is also good.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory view showing an example of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 60, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops Determine the combination of the decorative designs in which the 3 designs are the same even design (non-probable variation) as the design. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probable big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. Decide on a combination of decorative designs that are aligned with the same odd design (probable pattern).

  Specifically, when it is determined that “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit” is determined, the effect control CPU 101 extracts SR1-1 and uses the SR1-1 to stop the left middle right Determine the design (the combination of the decorative design with the left, middle and right designs aligned).

  Also, if the received display result specification command indicates "Suddenly positive probability big hit" or "small hit" (if the received display result specification command is the display result 5 specification command or the display result 6 specification command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination (eye of chance) of a decorative symbol such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of “off” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when it is accompanied by the reach effect, the combination of the decorative designs in which the two left and right designs are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 is, for example, the case where it is determined to be out of design, and when it is not determined to reach, SR1-1 to SR1-3. Extract, determine the left symbol using SR1-1, determine the middle symbol using SR1-2, and determine the right symbol using SR1-3. In addition, when the determined left and right designs match, the right design is shifted by one. When it is decided to reach, SR1-1-SR1-2 are extracted, the left and right symbols are determined using SR1-1, and the middle symbol is determined using SR1-2. In addition, when the determined left middle right symbol is a chance eye, for example, the left symbol is shifted by one symbol.

  In addition, also about a decorative pattern, it is called a big hit symbol a stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left middle and the right all are the same symbol are aligned) that evokes a big hit. In addition, the stop design which reminds of the release is called the release design.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 stores the start winning command (start winning designation command, symbol designation command and variation category command) stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the start winning command storage area. The contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted (step S8026).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes reach effect setting processing for setting a reach effect when reach is designated in the fluctuation pattern (step S8027).

  Next, when the second predetermined effect in-progress flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 selects a predetermined effect pattern to be started from the first period (see FIG. 43) (steps S8028 and S8029). A process table is selected according to the effect and the variation pattern (step S8030). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a value corresponding to the effect period of the predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect timer (step S8031). If the second predetermined effect in-progress flag is not set, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S8034).

  Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8035).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory view of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the CPU for effect control 101 controls the effect device (component for effect) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 61 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80.

  In the process table used when effect control is executed for the fluctuation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. It should be noted that instead of setting symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying symbols are generated in combination according to the determined stop symbols and the pseudo stop symbols in the pseudo reunion and the slip effect. May be

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8036). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  In this embodiment, the CPU for effect control 101 controls variable display of the decorative symbol according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner, but the CPU 101 for effect control controls The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8037).

  Then, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the process during symbol variation (step S802) (step S8038).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing reach effect setting processing (step S8027). In the reach effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command read in step S8022 is accompanied by the reach (step S6501). If it is accompanied by the reach, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the probability change state flag and the high base state flag are set (step S6502). If the probability change flag and the high base state flag are set (that is, if the high probability / high base state), the process proceeds to step S6505. If the high probability state flag or the high base state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the high probability / high base state), the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not the pre-reading notice execution flag is set. (Step S6503). If the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is set (that is, if the pre-reading notice effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S6505. If the pre-reading advance notice executing flag is not set either, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the background effect executing flag is set (step S6504). If the background rendering in progress flag is set (that is, if the background rendering is in progress), the process moves to step S6505.

  Then, in step S6505, the effect control CPU 101 sets the reach effect mode to be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol to a specific reach mode different from the normal reach mode (step S6505). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag or information indicating that the specific reach mode is set.

  Thereafter, if the specific reach mode is not set, the process table according to the normal reach mode is selected in steps S8030 and S8034 of the decorative symbol variation start process, and the normal reach mode is displayed during the variation display of the decorative symbol. Reach production is executed. Further, when the specific reach mode is set, the process table corresponding to the specific reach mode is selected in steps S8030 and S8034 of the decorative symbol fluctuation start process, and the reach effect is performed in the specific reach aspect during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Is executed. For example, a character different from the normal reach aspect is made to appear, or reach presentation is executed with a reach pattern different from the normal reach aspect.

  In this embodiment, the specific reach is controlled in the special rendering state (when the background screen is changed according to the high probability / high base state) by executing the processing of steps S6501 to S6505. While the reach effect of the aspect can be executed, the reach effect can be executed in the same manner as the specific reach aspect even when the special effect (pre-read advance notice effect or background effect) is executed.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect of the specific reach aspect is executed in the completely same manner as when the high probability / high base state is controlled, when performing the pre-reading preview effect, and when performing the background effect. Although the case where it does is shown, you may make it perform the reach production | presentation which a part of aspect has in common not only when performing the reach production of the completely same aspect. For example, the effect sound output from the speaker 27, the light emission pattern of the LED and the lamp, and the liquid crystal display screen when being controlled to the high probability / high base state, when performing the advance notice effect and when performing the background effect Only a part of the effects of the above display may be shared.

  FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing a process during decorative design variation (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the second predetermined effect executing flag is set (step S 840). If the second predetermined effect executing flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the second predetermined effect timer by 1 (step S841). Then, when the value of the second predetermined effect timer becomes 0 (step S842), the second predetermined effect is ended (step S843). Also, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the flag under execution of the second predetermined effect (step S844).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the values of the process timer and the fluctuation time timer by 1 (steps S845 and S846).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step S848). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S849). That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table to the process timer (step S850). In addition, according to the contents (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data) set next to it, a rendering device (a rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and a rendering component Control of the speaker 27) is executed (step S851).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S865). When the fluctuation time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decoration fluctuation stop processing (step S803) (step S867). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination specification command has been received is set (step S866), the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S867.

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are flowcharts showing the decorative symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 resets the confirmation command reception flag if the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S8300). Further, control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol in the effect display device 9 according to the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the decorative symbol display result storage area (step S8301).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to make a big hit (step S8303). Whether or not to decide to make a big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it is also possible to confirm whether or not it is decided to make a big hit by the stop symbol that has been decided. If it is not determined to be a big hit, the process proceeds to step S8311.

  If it is determined to make a big hit, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect (fanfare effect) notifying the start of the big hit (step S8304).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8305). Also, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), a rendering device (a presentation display device 9 as a presentation component, various lamps as a presentation component, and presentation components The control of the speaker 27) is executed (step S8306).

  Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8307).

  In step S8311, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the value of the first variation frequency counter is 0 (step S8311). If the value of the first variation frequency counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S8321. If the value of the first variation count counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the first variation count counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the first variation number counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). If the value of the first variation frequency counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S8321. If the value of the first variation frequency counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 sets a second predetermined effect executing flag (step S8314).

  In addition, when setting the flag under execution of the second predetermined effect, information which can specify the notification result of the second predetermined effect is also set. For example, information that can specify the notification result is a flag indicating that the notification result is "x", a flag indicating that the notification result is "chance", and a flag indicating that the notification result is "extensive heat" It is. Also, for example, when the second predetermined effect executing flag is configured by a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value specifying which notification result is to be a predetermined bit of the second predetermined effect executing flag By setting, it may be possible to specify which notification result is obtained.

  Then, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the second predetermined effect determination flag (step S8315), and proceeds to step S8321.

  In step S8321, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the value of the second variation number counter is 0 (step S8321). If the value of the second fluctuation number counter is 0, then the flow shifts to step S8326. If the value of the second variation count counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the second variation count counter (step S8322). Further, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the second fluctuation number counter is 0 (step S8323). If the value of the second fluctuation number counter is not 0, then the flow shifts to step S8326. When the value of the second fluctuation number counter is 0, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the flag under the preliminary notice in advance (step S8324). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen similar to the background screen according to the low probability / low base state (for example, the background screen of blue display color) (step S8325), the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect ends.

  In step S8326, the CPU for effect control 101 confirms whether or not the background effect executing flag is set (step S8326). If the background rendering in-progress flag is set, the CPU for effect control 101 resets the background rendering in-progress flag (step S 8327). Further, the CPU for effect control 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen similar to the background screen according to the low probability / low base state (for example, the background screen of blue display color) (step S8328), the execution of the background effect ends.

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S8326 to S8328, it is shown that the background effect is always ended every time the change ends, but the background effect is performed again in the next fluctuation display. Alternatively, the background effect may be continuously performed in the next variable display without temporarily ending the background effect at the end of the change.

  Then, the CPU for effect control 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8329).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 101 sequentially executes a big hit display process, an in-round process, a round post process, and a big hit end effect process.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the special gaming state (high probability / high base state in this example) advantageous for the player after the end of the specific gaming state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) In any of a plurality of effect states including a special effect state corresponding to (in this example, a state changed to a background screen of display color (for example, red) corresponding to a high probability / high base state) While performing control, when not being controlled to the special effect state (in this example, when being controlled to the low probability / low base state), special effects in the same manner as the special effect state (in the present example, prefetch preview It is possible to execute an effect or a background effect). Also, when the special effect is executed and controlled to the specific gaming state, the special effect is controlled at a higher rate than in the case where the special effect is not executed and controlled to the specific gaming state (in this example) As shown in Fig. 55 and Fig. 59, in the case of "probable big hit", the execution ratio of the advance announcement notice effect is higher than in the case of "normal big hit." In this case, the ratio of being controlled to the high probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game is higher than the case where the special effect is not executed and the big hit results. Then, when the special effect is executed for the first period (in the present embodiment, when the advance notice effect of only one change is executed or when the background effect is executed) and when the second period longer than the first period is executed (In this example, there is a case where preview advance notice effect is executed over a plurality of changes), and a ratio at which the specific display result is derived and displayed when the special effect is performed for the first period and when the second period is performed. Are different, and are controlled to the special effect state after the end of the specific gaming state at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 59, as special effects are executed over many variations, the expectation (reliability) for a big hit, or a probability change big hit (controlled to a positive change state) High degree of expectation (reliability). Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the special effect presentation period (in this example, the number of times of execution), and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the background screen similar to that in the high probability / high base state is displayed by the above configuration, and the preview advance notice effect as the special effect is executed, it becomes a big hit. Is likely to shift to a high probability / high base state after the end of the big hit game becoming a definite variation big hit. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively expect to shift to the high probability / high base state when the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, a case is described where preview advance notice effect as a special effect is continuously executed over a plurality of changes, but it is not necessary to execute prefetch notice effect as a continuous effect, and a plurality of advance notice effects are varied May be performed intermittently. Even when configured as such, depending on the length of the total execution period of the previewing notice effect that is executed intermittently, to the occurrence ratio of the big hit and the high probability / high base state after the big hit game end It is sufficient to change the transition ratio of

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as the number of times of execution of special effects increases, the execution ratio of special effects of probability variation big hit is the highest, the execution ratio of special effects of big hit is usually high next, and the special effect execution rate of off is Although the lowest case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special effect may be executed over many execution times as a whole as compared to the case of becoming a big hit, without distinguishing the probability variation big hit and the big hit normally. Even with such a configuration, as the number of executions of special effects increases, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit becomes high, and if the expectation for the big hit is high, the relative change is a big hit and controlled to a positive change state Expectation also increases, so the degree of expectation for being controlled in a definite variation state can also be increased as the number of times of execution of special effects increases.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a special effect, an effect similar to that in the high probability / high base state (in this example, a background screen with a display color (for example, red) exactly the same as the high probability / high base state) Although the case of performing the change) is shown, it is not necessarily the same effect as in the high probability / high base state. For example, some parts are the same as those in the high probability / high base state and other parts are different, or they are not the same in detail but similar to those in the high probability / high base state It is sufficient that the player can recognize that the player has the same effect mode, such as the one having the above aspect.

  In this embodiment, the special effect is executed as the effect on the effect display device 9 (effect on the liquid crystal display screen). However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. Any of a plurality of effects of lighting or blinking the LED lamp, an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound from the speaker 27, an effect on a liquid crystal display screen, an effect using the LED lamp, and an effect using the speaker 27 Various special effects can be considered, such as effects combined all.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute preview advance notice effect as a special effect, and to execute the special effect based on the determination result of the “normal big hit” or the “probable variation big hit” at the time of winning. As compared with the case where the special effect is executed on the basis of the determination result at the time of winning, the special effect is executed for a long effect period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, the advance notice advance presentation effect is executed over many fluctuations. Therefore, the expectation can be improved as the effect period of the special effect is extended, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a case is described where preview advance notice effect is executed as a special effect to be executed over a plurality of execution times, but not limited to prefetch advance notice effect, for example, pseudo sequence effect is executed as a special effect You may configure it. In this case, for example, as special rendition is executed over many re-variations of the pseudo-people, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit, and the expectation (reliability) for becoming the probability variation big hit become high. Good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the background screen is changed to the special rendering state (high probability / high base state, and display color according to the high probability / high base state (red in this example). In addition to being able to execute the specific reach effect (in this example, the reach effect of the specific reach aspect) when being controlled to the state), the specific reach when the special effect (pre-reading advance notice effect or background effect) is being executed A reach effect similar to the effect can be performed. Therefore, the special effect and the reach effect can be associated with each other, and the effect of the special effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the reach mode is determined by the effect control microcomputer 100, but may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may determine whether or not to set the specific reach mode, and may transmit a change pattern command that can also specify the determination result of the reach mode.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable winning means (in this example, the variable winning ball device 15) is in an advantageous state (in this example, a long open state for 5.8 seconds) and the start area (in this example) The special effect can be executed in the variable display executed based on the game ball having passed through the second start winning opening 14). Specifically, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed while being controlled to the low probability / low base state, the background effect is performed. Therefore, attention can be paid to the execution opportunity of the special effect, and interest in the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, even when variable display of the first special symbol is executed when being controlled to the low probability / low base state, special effects (prediction notice effect and background effect) are executed. Although it is configured such that there may be a case (see steps S8005 to S8008, S8013 to S8016), the special effect (background effect) is executable only when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. May be

  Further, in this embodiment, the case is described where the special effect (prediction announcement effect or background effect) can be executed only when controlled to the low probability / low base state, but it is a high base state. However, special effects may be configured to be executable. In this case, for example, even in the case of being controlled to the high base state, the preview advance notice effect or the background effect may be determined and executed as the special effect according to the same processing as this embodiment.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened in the low probability / low base state, a long-term opening of 5.8 seconds is performed, but a long-term opening such as 5.8 seconds is performed. In addition to the opening, for example, a short-term opening such as 0.1 second may be configured to be performed. And, when configured as such, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the short-term open state, the special effect is executed only in the variable display executed based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 It may be configured to

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed when being controlled to the low probability / low base state (start during the long opening of the variable winning ball device 15 for 5.8 seconds) In the case of winning a prize, the case where the special effect (background effect) is always executed is shown, but it is not limited to the case where the special effect is necessarily executed at a rate of 100%. The special effect (background effect) may be executed for a part of the case where the start winning is achieved during the 5.8 seconds long opening of the device 15.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, the state is controlled to a high probability / low base state as compared with the first special symbol variable display. Suddenly, the proportion of the probability variation jackpot controlled to the high probability / high base state is higher than the probability variation jackpot (see FIGS. 8D and 8E). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special effect is executed when the second special symbol variable display is executed and becomes a big hit, it is compared with the case where the special effect is not executed but becomes a big hit. Therefore, the ratio of being controlled to the high base state after the end of the big hit game is high.

  In the case of executing variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing variable display of the second special symbol, the allocation of the jackpot type may be the same. And, in this case, for example, when the microcomputer 100 for effect control becomes a big hit of the type to be shifted to the high base state (for example, when it becomes a probability variation big hit), the type of the microcomputer not to be shifted to the high base state The special rendering (background rendering) may be performed at a higher rate than when it is a big hit (for example, when it suddenly becomes a big hit).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the variable winning means (in the present example, the variable winning ball device 15) is in the advantageous state (in the present example, 5.8 seconds) in the normal state (in this example, the low base state) When it is in the open state), it is informed that the variable winning means is in the advantageous state (in this example, the first predetermined effect can be executed). Then, after ending the customer waiting demonstration display, the notification by the first predetermined effect is limited (see steps S755 and S757). Therefore, it is possible to prevent notification of being controlled in the advantageous state even though the game is not performed.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, there is shown the case of executing the advance notice of the preliminary display effect of changing the background screen in the effect display device 9, but in combination with the configuration shown in the first embodiment, the display of the hold display The pre-reading effect of the aspect which makes the aspect different from usual may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, a second embodiment in which the pre-reading effect of the aspect in which the display mode of the hold display is different from the normal mode can be performed will be described.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, for example, in addition to the processing shown in FIG. 42, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines a pre-reading effect in a mode in which the display mode of the suspension display is different from normal. Execute pre-read effect determination processing. Further, in this embodiment, in place of the first hold storage display unit 18c and the second hold storage display unit 18d shown in the first embodiment, a total holding storage display unit for displaying the total number of pending storages is provided. It shall be. Also, in the first embodiment, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol is shown, but in this embodiment, the first start winning opening is The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol shall be executed in the order of the start winnings on the 13 and the second start winning opening 14.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing pre-reading effect determination processing in the second embodiment. In the pre-reading effect determination process, the CPU 101 for production control checks whether or not the pre-reading effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67101). The pre-reading effect restriction flag is set in step S67111 described later. If the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold memory display unit to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold memory in the normal mode (step S67116). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit is displayed, the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the sixth hold display in the normal mode.

  If the prefetch effect restriction flag is not set, the CPU for effect control 101 stores the result of the previous winning judgment (this time reception result is stored in the winning judgment result storage buffer (corresponding to the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 40) All winning combination determination result designation commands (except for the winning combination determination result indicated by the symbol designation command and the variation category command) are extracted (step S67102).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether all the extracted determination results at the time of winning show the determination results indicating “non-reach” (step S67103). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S67103 whether the extracted winning determination results are all values indicating that the variation pattern is “shortened non-reach out” or “non-reach out”. (Ie, check if there is an out-of-range fluctuation with no reach).

  If all the winning determination results extracted in step S67103 indicate “non-reach”, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S67104. On the other hand, when the extracted determination results at the time of winning are not all determination results indicating "non reach", the effect control CPU 101 causes the total suspension storage display unit to normally display a new suspension display corresponding to the latest suspension storage. Is displayed (step S67116). That is, in this embodiment, when there is a pending storage in which the variable display accompanied by the reach effect is performed, the preread effect is not executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. In addition to the example shown in FIG. 66, even when there is a pending storage in which variable display with reach effect is performed, the prefetch effect is executed based on the newly received winning time determination result specification command. May be

  In step S67104, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts the latest determination result at the time of winning stored in the determination result storage buffer at the time of winning (result at the time of winning indicated by the command received at the time of winning determination received this time). It is determined based on the hour determination result whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (step S67104).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A).

  FIG. 67A is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading effect execution determination table in the second embodiment. Although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“Perform pre-reading effect” or “Do not perform pre-reading effect”) is assigned to the pre-reading effect execution determination table for each winning-time determination result, FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the proportion of assigned judgment values is shown to simplify the explanation. For example, the CPU for effect control 101 extracts a random number for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determines a determination item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned (“execute the pre-reading effect” or “Do not execute preread effect”). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), the numerical values corresponding to "execute pre-read effect" and "do not execute pre-read effect" in the determination result at each winning are "execute pre-read effect" as the decision item. Or “% does not execute pre-reading effect” is shown.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A), the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 67 (B), the pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although the judgment values are actually assigned to the prefetching effect change timing determination table shown and the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 70, the ratio of the judgment values assigned to simplify the explanation is shown There is. In addition, in steps S67106, S67107, S67108, S67110, and S67115, which will be described later, in which those tables are used, as in step S67104, for example, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode, pre-reading effect pattern, change timing (number of shifts Or a random number for determining the presentation mode of the suggested effect is extracted, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is determined as the assigned matter.

  In step S67104, based on the latest winning determination result extracted, the effect control CPU 101 performs prefetching effects at a rate determined for each winning determination result in the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A). Decide whether to run or not. For example, when the winning determination result indicates that “shortening non-reach is off”, the effect control CPU 101 determines not to execute the pre-reading effect at a rate of 100%. Further, for example, when it is indicated that “per simulated ream 3 supermarkets” is determined as the winning determination result, the effect control CPU 101 determines to execute the advance effect at a rate of 99%.

  The characteristic feature of the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A) is that the display result is "normal big hit" or "probably variable big hit" as compared with the case where the display result is "off". The determination value is set such that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is performed is high. In addition, it is characteristic in the pre-read effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 67 (A) that the reach effect with high expectation degree is performed even if the display result is the same (for example, the super reach is performed than the normal reach) However, the judgment value is set such that the rate at which the pre-reading effect is performed is high. By providing such a feature, when pre-reading effect is executed, it is expected that the rate of occurrence of big hit in the variable display of the advance notice object is increased and the big hit is expected as compared with the case where pre-reading effect is not executed It is possible to increase the rate at which reach effect with a high degree is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the preread effect to be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), it is determined that the prefetching effect is to be executed at a ratio of 1% even when the result of the winning determination is “non-reach out”, but “non-reach” In the case of "reach out" or "non-reach out", it may not be decided to execute pre-reading effect. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 67 (A), a determination value (ratio) is set to determine whether or not to execute pre-reading effect for each of the fluctuation patterns shown by the winning determination result. Judgment value (percentage) to decide whether or not to execute pre-reading effect for each display result (for example, "off", "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" or "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") May be set.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (Y in step S67105), the process proceeds to step S67105a. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not executed (N in step S67105), the effect control CPU 101 causes the total hold storage display unit to display a new hold display corresponding to the latest hold storage in the normal mode. (Step S67116).

  In step S67105a, the CPU for effect control 101 sets the total number of pending storages in the counter for the combined pending storage number of effects for specifying the pending display to be the target of the pre-reading effect (step S67105a). The value of the effect combination total storage number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1802a of the decorative symbol variation start process, and is used to specify a suspension display to be an object of pre-reading effect in step S1811. For example, when the value of the combined holding memory number counter for effect is 4, the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the fourth holding display of the total holding memory display unit is executed. In this embodiment, the total number of pending storages can be obtained by summing the value of the first pending storage number counter and the value of the second pending storage number counter.

  Next, in the pre-reading effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines in which display mode the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified in advance is to be displayed (step S67106). In this embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display, in addition to the normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode and a second special mode are provided. However, as described later, the pending display displayed in the special mode changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the pending information corresponding to the pending display is started. Is displayed. Therefore, in step S67106, the final display mode is determined to be either the first special mode or the second special mode. Hereinafter, the first special mode and the second special mode may be collectively referred to as special modes.

  FIG. 67 (B) is an explanatory view showing a final display mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step S67106, the effect control CPU 101 determines which display mode is to be finally displayed (hereinafter also referred to as a final display mode) using the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 67 (B). Specifically, the final display mode is determined at a ratio determined for each of the winning determination results (display results of the variable display) in the final display mode determination table based on the extracted latest winning determination result. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “off” in the winning determination result, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode as the first special mode at a rate of 80%. . Further, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit” in the winning determination result, the effect control CPU 101 performs the final display mode at a rate of 80%. In the second special aspect.

  The characteristic of the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 67 (B) is that the display result is "normal big hit" or "probably variable big hit" compared to the case where the display result is "off". The determination value is set such that the ratio determined in the second special mode is high. By providing such a feature, when the hold display is displayed in the second special mode, the rate at which the jackpot occurs in the variable display for the advance notice is higher than when it is displayed in the first special mode. can do. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the one displayed in the second special mode will be a big hit than the first special mode, and in which display mode the hold display is displayed when the pre-reading effect is executed Can be focused on

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), the display result shown in the result of the winning determination (finally, “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” or “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) is final Although the determination value (ratio) for determining the display mode is set, for example, the final display mode for each variation pattern indicated by the determination result at the time of winning as in the prefetch presentation execution execution determination table of FIG. A determination value (percentage) may be set to determine. By doing so, when the pending display is displayed in the second special mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be high.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two types of display modes of the first special mode and the second special mode are provided as final display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of display modes are provided, respectively. The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio selected depending on the display result may be different).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect pattern of prefetch effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a prefetch effect pattern) (step S67107).

  In this embodiment, a first pre-reading effect pattern and a second pre-reading effect pattern are provided as pre-reading effect patterns. In the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice object is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode without being displayed in the special mode. The first pre-reading effect pattern is a variation display of the advance target that is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the change display (pending information) of the advance target at the timing of the start winning. The hold indication corresponding to the variable indication (hold information) of the notice object is changed and displayed from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode at an arbitrary shift timing until the (hold information) is started And. On the other hand, in the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing until the change display of the advance notice object is started, The display is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  In the second look-ahead effect pattern, instead of immediately displaying in the special mode at the timing of the start winning, the holding display of the normal mode is displayed at the timing of the starting winning, and then the timing of the shift of the holding display or The normal mode may be changed to the special mode when the period has elapsed. Then, after that, the special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing when the hold display shifts or the timing when a predetermined period elapses.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table in the second embodiment. In step S67107, the CPU for effect control 101 determines a prefetch effect pattern based on the prefetch effect pattern determination table and the total number of pending storages. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or "small In the case of “hit”), the hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 (A) is used. Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at the ratio determined for each total number of pending storages in the hit pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on either.

  Also, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result is “off”, the effect control CPU 101 uses the hit prefetching effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 (B). Then, the CPU 101 for effect control controls the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate determined for each total number of pending storages in the out-of-time pre-reading effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Decide on either.

  For example, the display result of the variable display indicated by the winning determination result is hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit"), and the total number of pending storages is 2 In some cases, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the pre-reading effect pattern as the first pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 35% and the second pre-reading effect pattern at a rate of 65%. Further, for example, when the display result of the variable display indicated by the winning determination result is “disappearance” and the total number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 has a rate of 65% of the pre-reading effect pattern In the first pre-read effect pattern, the second pre-read effect pattern is determined at a rate of 35%.

  The characteristic feature of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the display result of the variable display hits (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit” compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the proportion determined in the second pre-reading effect pattern is higher in the case of “suddenly a definite odd change big hit” or “small hit”. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (ie when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination, and then displayed in a special mode after being displayed ) When the pre-reading effect is performed in the first pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode), the change display of the advance notice target The rate of occurrence of can be increased. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, the rate at which the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode is high, so the prefetching effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (Ie, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination and then displayed in a special mode), the hold display displayed in the special mode is more likely to be a big hit than the first special mode. The rate of change to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it can be made to pay attention to which pre-reading effect pattern is executed with pre-reading effect. Further, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the on-hold display is displayed in the special mode at the start winning), the on-hold display displayed in the special mode is expected more than the first special mode. Since it is easy to change to the second special mode with a high degree, the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved. Moreover, in this embodiment, the pending display displayed in the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display corresponding to the pending display (hold information) is started. As it is displayed, the sense of expectation can be sustained until the hold display is displayed in a special mode and then changes to a special mode.

  Further, what is characteristic in the prefetch presentation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second prefetch presentation effect pattern when the total number of pending storages is one. In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode at the start winning is changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is the target of the advance notice. It is an arbitrary shift timing until variable display is started. However, if the total number of pending storages is 1 (that is, only the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the notice target is displayed), when the shift of the hold display is performed once, the variable display of the notice target is supported. The pending display will be erased. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is not possible to change the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the variable display of the advance target at the shift timing. Therefore, when the total number of pending storages is 1, the determination value is set so as not to be determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern.

  Note that even if the total number of pending storages is 1, the second pre-reading effect pattern may be configured to be able to be determined. In this case, for example, the hold display is displayed in the special mode at the timing of the start winning, and the timing before the hold display is shifted (for example, 2 seconds after the display of the hold display in the special mode, etc. The special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode at a short period of time or at a timing when a time corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed. In addition, for example, when it is configured to be able to display the pending display according to the currently executing fluctuation even after the shift of the pending display (in the case where it is configured to be able to display the pending display in the so-called active pending display area) The special mode may be changed to the first special mode or the second special mode in the active hold display area.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the hold display changes from the normal mode to the first special mode or the second special mode in the first pre-reading effect pattern, and the second In the pre-reading effect pattern, the timing at which the suspension display changes from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode is set as an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the notice object is started, Not only this but another timing may be sufficient. For example, the display mode may be changed at an arbitrary timing during a variable display (a period over one variable display or a plurality of variable displays) which is executed before the start of the variable display of the advance target. In this case, for example, even when the total number of pending storages is 1, it is possible to decide on the second pre-reading effect pattern, and the pending display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning prize, corresponding to the pending display (pending information) The special mode may be changed from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode before the variable display is started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, the display result indicated by the judgment result at the time of winning is a hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") and "off" For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit” or In the case of “small hit”, a pre-reading effect pattern determination table may be provided which determines any pre-reading effect pattern at a different ratio. Further, for example, similarly to the prefetching effect execution determination table of FIG. 67 (A), a prefetching effect pattern determination table is provided to determine one of the prefetching effect patterns in different proportions for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning determination. You may do so. By doing so, when the pre-read effect is executed in the first pre-read effect pattern, reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice object The proportion can also be high.

  Once the preread effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 determines a change timing (in this example, the number of shifts of the hold display) for changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target. The determined change timing (number of shifts) is set in a shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) (step S67108). In this embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) of the advance notice target is the shift timing of any hold display. Therefore, by determining the change timing (the number of shifts), it is determined at what timing the shift is performed with respect to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object at which the display mode is changed. For example, when the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined to be 2, the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing when the second shift is performed on the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice target.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of a change timing determination table according to the second embodiment. In step S67108, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the change timing (the number of shifts) of the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the advance notice target based on the change timing determination table and the total hold number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big variation big hit" or "small In the case where the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-reading effect pattern, the first pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69A is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at the ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69A. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In the example shown in FIG. 69, the fact that the change timing (number of shifts) is 0 means that the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning. In the case where the hold display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode at the timing of the start winning, for example, a new hold display is realized by displaying the first special mode or the second special mode from the beginning. Alternatively, it may be realized by displaying a new hold display once in a normal mode and immediately changing it to the first special mode or the second special mode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest winning-time determination result is “off” and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the first pre-reading effect pattern. The first look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 (B) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each of the total hold memory numbers in the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") If the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hit second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 (C) is used. Then, the CPU for effect control 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at the ratio determined for each total hold memory number in the hit second prefetched effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69C. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the display result of the variable display indicated by the extracted latest prize determination result is “off” and the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-reading effect pattern, The second pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 (D) is used. Then, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target at a rate determined for each of the total hold memory numbers in the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure shown in FIG. The timing (number of shifts) is determined to be any of 0 (at the time of winning) to 7.

  For example, when using the hit first look-ahead effect change timing determination table, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 sets the change timing (the number of shifts) to 0 at 0 (50%) The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 1 at a rate of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 20%. Also, when using the first look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 changes the timing (number of shifts) to 0 (winning number) at a ratio of 20%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 1 at a ratio of 30%, and the change timing (number of shifts) is determined as 2 at a ratio of 50%.

  Further, for example, when the second pre-reading effect change timing determination table for winning use is used, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 changes the timing (number of shifts) by 1 at a ratio of 30%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 70%. Further, when using the second look-ahead effect change timing determination table at the time of departure, if the total number of pending storages is 3, the effect control CPU 101 determines the change timing (number of shifts) to be 1 at a ratio of 70%. The change timing (number of shifts) is determined to be 2 at a rate of 30%.

  The characteristic of the look-ahead effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that, in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern, the display result of the fluctuation display is a hit as compared to the case where the display result of the fluctuation display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the number of shifts is determined to be smaller is higher when (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It is being done. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the first pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the on-hold display is displayed in the special mode without being displayed in the special mode), the on-hold display is performed. If the number of shifts changes from the normal mode to the special mode with a smaller number of shifts, it is possible to increase the rate of occurrence of hitting in the variable display of the advance notice, and further displayed in the special mode at the start winning combination (0 shift). It is possible to increase the rate at which hits occur. Therefore, it is possible to give an interest to the timing at which the hold display changes, and it is possible to enhance the game interest.

  What is characteristic in the pre-reading effect change timing determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that, in the case of the second pre-reading effect pattern, the display result of the variable display is hit as compared to the case where the display result of the variable display is “off”. The judgment value is set so that the rate at which the number of times of shift changes is determined is higher when (for example, “normal big hit”, “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit” or “small hit”) It is being done. By providing such a feature, when the pre-reading effect is performed in the second pre-reading effect pattern (that is, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode at the start winning combination and then changed to the special mode), The change to the special mode in which the special mode hold display changes to the special mode with a larger number of shifts (that is, after many shifts have been made) can increase the rate at which a hit occurs in the advance display of the variable display. That is, the longer the period from the display of the pending display in the special mode to the change to the special mode (that is, the later the timing of the change is), the higher the rate of occurrence of hits in the variable display for the advance notice can be made. . Therefore, the hold display can be changed at a plurality of timings, and attention can be paid to the timing at which the hold display displayed in the special mode changes, which can enhance the fun of the game.

  In this embodiment, in order to simplify the description, the timing at which the display mode of the suspension display is changed is an arbitrary shift timing until the variable display of the advance notice object is started. In the case where the display mode can be changed at any timing before the start of display, for example, a plurality of types of change timing patterns that can specify the timing to be changed (such as a specific shift timing or a specific change display) May be provided, and either one may be selected according to the result of the winning determination.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69, in the case of the first prefetch effect pattern, the smaller the number of shifts (that is, the earlier the change timing is), the better, and in the case of the second prefetch effect pattern, the larger number of shifts. Is set to be more advantageous (that is, the later the timing of change is), but for the sake of clarity to the player, for example, the one with a large number of shifts even in the case of the first look-ahead effect pattern (ie change) The later timing may be set to be advantageous). Also, for example, in the case of the second pre-reading effect pattern, it may be set to be advantageous if the number of shifts is smaller (that is, as the timing of change is earlier).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 69, the display result indicated by the judgment result at the time of winning is a hit (for example, "normal big hit", "probably big hit", "suddenly big hit" or "small hit") and "off" For example, even if the display result is a hit, the case of “normal big hit” or “probably big hit” and “suddenly big hit” or In the case of “small hit”, a change timing determination table may be provided in which any change timing (number of shifts) is determined at different rates. Further, for example, similarly to the prefetch presentation effect execution determination table of FIG. 67 (A), a change to determine any one change timing (number of shifts) at a different ratio for each change pattern indicated by the winning determination A timing determination table may be provided. By doing so, according to the change timing of the reserve display corresponding to the fluctuation display of the notice target, the rate at which the big hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the notice target is made different, and the rate at which reach effect with high expectation is performed Can also be different.

  In this embodiment, in the second look-ahead effect pattern, a new hold display is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, but a hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the timing of the start win, The timing may be changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and may be changed from the special mode to the special mode at any later timing.

  When the change timing (the number of shifts) is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the change display of the hold display when the pre-read effect pattern determined in step S67107 is the second pre-read effect pattern (Y in step S67109) The effect mode of the suggested effect is determined (step S67110). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute suggestion effects that suggest that the display mode of the hold display changes. Further, the suggestive effect is performed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. In step S67110, the effect aspect of the suggestion effect performed at the change timing of the hold display is determined to be either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect.

  In this embodiment, the hold display changes to the first special mode or the second special mode at different rates according to the presentation mode of the suggestion effect. Specifically, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode, the rate at which the pending display changes to the first special mode is high, and when the suggested effect is executed in the second effect mode, the pending operation is suspended. The rate at which the display changes to the second special mode is high. Therefore, it is suggested that the display mode of the suspension display changes by the execution of the suggestion effect, and it is easy to change to any of the special modes depending on which production mode the suggestion effect is executed. It is suggested. Although the details will be described later, the hold display changes at the shift timing, but the suggestion effect is also executed at shift timings other than the shift timing at which the hold display changes. Therefore, in order to distinguish them, suggestive effects performed at the shift timing when the pending display changes is also referred to as a suggested effect (success pattern), and shift timing other than the shift timing when the pending display changes (that is, the pending display changes Suggested staging performed at a shift timing (a shift timing prior to the shift timing) is also referred to as a suggested staging (pass pattern). In this embodiment, any of the suggestive effect (success pattern) and the suggestive effect (pass pattern) is executed in the first effect mode or the second effect mode. Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes may be different depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect. For example, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the first effect mode A may be different from the first effect mode and the second effect mode of this embodiment), the pending display changes. The rate of making is low, and the suggested rendering is performed in the second rendering mode (for example, the first rendering mode B of this embodiment may be taken as the first rendering mode B different from the second rendering mode and the first rendering mode A) In this case, the rate at which the pending display changes may be increased. That is, when the suggested effect is executed in the first effect mode (first effect mode A), the proportion of the suggested effect (success pattern) is high, and the suggested effect is the second effect mode (first effect mode B) In the case where it is carried out in the above, the proportion of the suggested effect (passing pattern) may be increased.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step S67110, the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect performed at the change timing of the hold display, using the suggested effect mode determination table shown in FIG. Specifically, based on the latest determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode is set to the first effect mode or the effect mode at a ratio determined for each at-time determination result (display result of variation display) in the final display mode determination table. One of the second rendering modes is determined. For example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is "off" in the winning determination result, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect mode as the first effect mode at a rate of 80%, The rendering mode is determined to be the second rendering mode at a rate of 20%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the fluctuation display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit” by the judgment result at the time of winning, the CPU 101 for effect control at a ratio of 20% The first effect mode is determined, and the effect mode is determined to be the second effect mode at a rate of 80%. In addition, for example, when it is indicated that the display result of the variable display is “suddenly probability big hit” or “small hit” in the winning determination result, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect mode at a rate of 50%. Is determined to be the first effect mode, and the effect mode is determined to be the second effect mode at a rate of 50%.

  The characteristic thing in the suggestion effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 70 is that the display result is "normal big hit" or "probably variable big hit" compared to the case where the display result is "off", the second one The proportion determined in the presentation mode is set to be high. By providing such a feature, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance target is higher than when it is displayed in the first effect mode. can do. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit”, the percentage of the final display mode of the hold display becoming the second special mode is high, so the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode When this happens, the rate at which the display mode of the pending display changes to the second special mode having a higher degree of expectation than the first special mode is high. Therefore, while being able to give variety to suggestion production, it can be made to pay attention to which suggestion production of presentation mode is performed, and it is possible to improve game interest.

  In the example shown in FIG. 70, the effect of the presentation effect suggested for each display result shown in the winning determination result (“off”, “normal big hit” or “probable change big hit” or “sudden positive change big hit” or “small hit”) Although the ratio for determining the mode is determined, for example, similarly to the prefetch presentation execution execution determination table of FIG. 67 (A), the presentation mode of the suggested presentation is determined for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the winning determination result. It is also possible to set a determination value (ratio) for By doing so, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode, in addition to increasing the rate at which the big hit occurs in the variable display of the advance notice, the rate at which reach effect with a high degree of expectation is performed Can also be high.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 70, the presentation mode of the suggested rendering depending on whether or not the judgment result at the time of winning is “normally big hit” or “probably big hit”, “suddenly big hit”, “small hit” or not. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to determine the effect mode of the suggested effect depending on whether or not it is determined to change the display mode of the hold display.

  In this embodiment, the suggested effect is always executed at the shift timing when the display mode of the pending display changes, but the suggested effect may not be executed. In this case, since the display mode of the hold display can be suddenly changed without being suggested by the suggestion effect, the sense of surprise can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although two types of presentation modes of a 1st presentation mode and a 2nd presentation mode are provided as a production mode of suggestion production, it is not restricted to this but three or more types of presentation modes are provided The degree of expectation may be different (the ratio of selection according to the display result may be different).

  When the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-read effect restriction flag indicating that the execution of the pre-reading effect is restricted (step S67111).

  When the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, the pre-reading effect is controlled so as not to be repeatedly performed by the process of step S67101. That is, in this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, control is performed so as not to newly execute pre-reading effect. Therefore, the display of a plurality of pending displays in a special manner is limited. Therefore, by displaying a plurality of hold displays in a special mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to which hold display should be noted.

  In this embodiment, when any pending display is displayed in a special mode, it is controlled not to execute pre-reading effect repeatedly, but it is not limited to this, pre-reading effect is overlappingly executed It may be permitted at a fixed rate or completely permitted. That is, the process of step S67111 may be partially or completely omitted, so that a plurality of pending displays may be displayed in a special mode or completely. In addition, for example, even when any one of the suspension displays is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode as well as in the special mode, control may be performed so as not to repeatedly perform the pre-reading effect. For example, when executing the process of step S67114, when performing the process of step S67115, or when it is determined that it is the timing to change the hold display from the normal mode to the special mode in the decorative symbol variation start process (for example, step This can be realized by setting a pre-read effect restriction flag to S1803, etc.). Also, in this case, the pre-reading effect restriction flag may be reset when the pending display displayed in the special mode is deleted (that is, while the pending display is displayed in the special mode, the pre-reading effect) Execution is limited). In this way, when any hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, it is restricted that the other hold display is displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode by the new pre-reading effect. Therefore, the player can easily understand which hold display to watch.

  In addition, for example, when any one of the hold displays is displayed in the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode, a new pre-reading effect may be easily performed. That is, the pre-reading effect may be superimposed and may be easily performed. In addition, for example, in the case of a specific gaming state (for example, a probability change state or a time saving state), the pre-reading effect may be made to be performed repeatedly. For example, in a configuration that allows repeated execution of pre-reading effects at a constant rate, in the case of a specific gaming state, this can be realized by increasing the allowed rate.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold display unit to display a new hold display in a special mode (step S67112). In step S67112, the CPU for effect control 101 controls to display a new hold display in a special mode, and information indicating the final display mode determined in step S67106 and an effect of the suggested effect determined in step S67110. Information indicating an aspect is stored in a storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the decorative symbol variation start process.

  Further, if the pre-reading effect pattern determined in step S67107 is not the second pre-reading effect pattern (N in step S67109), that is, if the first pre-reading effect pattern is determined, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process in step S67108. It is confirmed whether the determined change timing is the start winning combination (step S67113). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not. Then, if the change timing is the start winning combination (Y in step S67113), the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold storage display unit to display a new hold display in the final display mode determined in step S67107. Step S67114).

  Further, if the change timing is not winning in step S67113 (N in step S67113), the CPU for effect control 101 determines the effect mode of the suggested effect to be performed at the change timing of the hold display as in the above step S67110 ( Step S67115). Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the total hold display unit to display a new hold display in the normal mode (step S67116). In step S67116 (for example, only when the process proceeds from step S67115), similarly to step S67112, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a new hold display, and the final display determined in step S67106. The information indicating the mode and the information indicating the effect mode of the suggestion effect determined in step S67115 are stored in the storage area formed in the RAM. By storing these pieces of information, it is possible to specify which final display mode and the effect mode of the suggested effect are determined in the decorative symbol variation start process described later.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the prize determination result specification command is received, the new hold display is either the normal mode, the special mode, the first special mode, or the second special mode in the pre-reading effect determination process. Processing to display at is performed.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 71, the effect control CPU 101 performs the process corresponding to steps S8000 to S8016 and S8027 to S8031 shown in FIGS. Also run.

  In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first deletes the first prize determination result (oldest determination result) stored in the prize determination result storage buffer, and then the prize control is executed. The contents of the determination result storage buffer are shifted, the first pending display in the combined pending storage display section is erased, and the remaining pending displays are shifted one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the combined pending storage display section Are updated (step S1800). For example, when the first to fifth hold display of the total hold storage display unit is displayed, the first hold display is erased at the shift timing, and the second hold display is displayed. The display is shifted to the first display area, the hold display displayed in the third is shifted to the second display area, and the hold display displayed in the fourth is the third display area And the fifth pending display is shifted to the fourth display area. In addition, when it is comprised so that priority is given to one of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol and the change display of it is executed, production control CPU101 is synchronized to the 1st special symbol fluctuation display To execute the variation display of the decorative symbol (specifically, when the first symbol variation designated command reception flag is set), the first winning determination determination result storage buffer (the first prize shown in FIG. 40). (1) The first winning combination determination result stored in the start winning combination command storage area is deleted, and the content of the first winning combination determination result storage buffer is shifted. In addition, at the time of the second prize when you execute the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (specifically, when the second symbol fluctuation specification command reception flag is set), The first winning determination result stored in the determination result storage buffer (corresponding to the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 40) is deleted, and the content of the second winning determination result storage buffer is shifted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the value of the shift number counter for specifying the change timing (number of shifts) is larger than 0 (step S1801). The fact that the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 means that it is decided to execute the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode for any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit. It shows. Therefore, in step S1801, it is confirmed whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect (changing the display mode of the hold display) is determined.

  When the value of the shift number counter is not larger than 0 (N in step S1801), that is, the value of the shift number counter is 0 and it is determined that the pre-reading effect is performed (the display mode of the hold display is changed) If not, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S1804.

  On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is greater than 0 (Y in step S1801), that is, if it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect (change the display mode of the hold display), for effect control The CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the effect sum total storage number counter (step S1802a). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts one from the value of the shift number counter (step S1802b). Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the value of the shift number counter is 0 or not (step S1803). As a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the shift number counter in step S1802b, the fact that the value of the shift number counter becomes 0 changes the display mode of any of the hold displays displayed on the total hold memory display unit. It indicates that it is time to execute the pre-reading effect to be made. Therefore, in step S1803, it is confirmed whether it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the hold display.

  In step S1803, when the value of the shift number counter is not 0, that is, when it is not the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1804. On the other hand, if the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1808.

  In step S1804, the effect control CPU 101 reads out a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1804).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the decorative pattern (the received display result designation command) according to the variation pattern command read in step S1804 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The stop symbol) is determined (step S1805). That is, by the effect control CPU 101 executing the process of step S1805, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means Display result determining means for determining the symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 determines an effect mode of the suggested effect which suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes (step S1806). Here, the process of step S1806 is not performed at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes due to the pre-reading effect. Therefore, in step S1806, although it suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes, as a result, the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed when the display mode does not change is determined. In addition, in order to distinguish from the suggestion effect (success pattern) performed when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect performed when the display mode does not change is also referred to as a suggestive effect (pass pattern).

  In step S1806, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when any holding display is not displayed in the special mode in the total holding display unit 18c, the effect control CPU 101 suggests in FIG. 71A. It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (pass pattern) or to execute the first effect mode or the second effect mode at a ratio of the effect (pass pattern) determination table. Further, the effect control CPU 101, when the pre-read effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the totals hold display unit 18c, suggestive effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) (Passing Pattern) It is decided not to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) or to execute it in the first effect mode or the second effect mode by the ratio of the determination table. In addition, although the judgment value corresponding to the decision item (“no effect”, “first effect mode” or “second effect mode”) is assigned to the suggested effect (pass pattern) determination table, FIG. In the example shown to A) and (B), in order to simplify description, the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the effect mode of the suggested effect (passing pattern), and the determination items (“no effect”, “No effect”, or the (1) It is decided on the "presentation mode" or the "second presentation mode".

  For example, when the pre-read effect restriction flag is not set, that is, when no hold display is displayed in the special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, it is determined that the suggested effect (pass pattern) is not executed at a rate of 60%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode at a rate of 30%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode at a rate of 10%. Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, it is assumed that the suggested effect (pass pattern) is not executed at a rate of 0%. It is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the first effect mode at a rate of 60%, and it is determined that the suggestion effect is performed in the second effect mode at a rate of 40%.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), in this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, any hold display is displayed in a special mode on the total hold display unit 18c. In the case where they are present, the suggestive effects are executed at a higher rate than in the case where they are not. Therefore, the sense of expectation when the hold display is displayed in the special mode can be enhanced, and the game interest can be enhanced. In this embodiment, since the suggestion effect is executed even when the display mode of the hold display changes, the suggestion effect is always executed when the hold display is displayed in the special mode. However, even when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effect may not be performed. However, also in this case, it is desirable that the suggestion effect be performed at a higher rate than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode.

  Further, when the pre-reading effect restriction flag is set, that is, when any hold display is displayed in a special mode in the total hold display unit 18c, the final display mode of the hold display is the first display mode or Depending on which of the second display modes is selected, the effect mode of the suggested effect may be determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode at different rates. For example, when the final display mode is determined to be the second display mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the first display mode, the effect mode in the suggested effect is the second effect mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the first effect mode. The rate to be determined may be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, display control in which an arrow flies from the right side of the display area is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes. When the display mode of the hold display changes (in the case of the suggestion effect (success pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow is stuck in the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified. Further, when the display mode of the hold display does not change (in the case of the suggestion effect (pass pattern)), display control is performed in which the flying arrow passes through the display area as it is. Therefore, in step S1806, it is not necessary to specify the pending display corresponding to the pending information to be notified, using step S1811, which will be described later, using the counter for total number of pending storages for effect. Note that, for example, in the effect display device 9 as a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes at both the time when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when it is not the time. When it is the timing to change the display mode of the hold display by performing display control in which the arrow in which the arrow flew from the right side of the display area pierces the hold display corresponding to the hold information to be notified, the hold display When it is not the timing to change the display mode (corresponding to the suggestion effect (success pattern)) and to change the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display pierced by the arrow is not changed (the suggestion effect of this example (pass pattern Equivalent to)). In this case, in step S1806, the effect control CPU 101 specifies the pending display corresponding to the pending information to be notified using the combined pending memory number counter for effect as in step S1811 described later, and step S1807 You may select the process table for executing the suggestion effect to the hold display identified in step, or randomly determine the hold display that the arrow sticks from among the displayed hold display, and for the determined hold display You may make it select the process table for performing suggestion production.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table according to the effect mode and the fluctuation pattern of the determined effect effect (passing pattern) (step S1807). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S1812).

  In addition, the CPU for effect control 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the effect device (effects display device 9 as effect parts, effect elements as effect parts Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S1813). For example, in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9, an instruction is output to the VDP 109. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S1814), and processes the value of the production control process flag during the decorative symbol fluctuation (step S802) To a value corresponding to (step S1815).

  If it is determined in step S1803 that the value of the shift number counter is 0, that is, if it is the change timing of the pre-reading effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the effect control CPU 101 sets the pre-reading effect restriction flag. If it is, it is reset (step S1808). By performing such processing, in this embodiment, it is possible to newly limit the execution of the pre-reading effect during the period in which the hold display is displayed in the special mode, and a plurality of hold displays are special. It can be limited to be displayed in an aspect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads out a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S1809). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result of the decorative design (the received display result designation command) according to the variation pattern command read in step S1809 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The stop symbol) is determined (step S1810).

  Next, the CPU for effect control 101 selects a process table for display mode change according to the effect mode of the suggested effect, the final display mode of the suspension display specified by the counter for total stored memory number for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. (Step S1811). Then, the process proceeds to step S1812.

  With the process table for display mode change, along with the change display of the decoration pattern, at the start of the change of the decoration pattern, execute the suggestion effect (success pattern) and execute the pre-reading effect to change the display mode of the specific hold display It is a table in which process data for performing control is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of process tables for changing display modes are provided in accordance with the modes of the suggested effect (success pattern) to be executed and the pre-read effect. Also, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the suggested presentation (success pattern) determined (step S67110 or S67115) and stored in the prefetch presentation effect determination process (in this example, the first presentation aspect or the second presentation aspect) And hold display of the display object specified by the counter for total storage for display (for example, when the value of counter for total storage for display is 2, the second display for hold in the total storage display unit); Suggested staging (success pattern) in any mode based on the final display mode (in this example, the first display mode or the second display mode) determined in the pre-reading effect determination process (step S67106) and stored Can be executed to specify which pending display should be changed to what display mode to execute the pre-reading effect. Therefore, the CPU for effect control 101 displays a plurality of types of display modes according to the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern), the final display mode of the on-hold display specified by the counter for total stored memory number for effect, and the fluctuation pattern. A presentation aspect determined in the pre-reading effect determination processing by selecting any of the process table for change time and executing control of the presentation device according to the contents of process data 1 of the selected process table for change form The suggestion effect (success pattern) can be executed and the pre-reading effect of changing the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice object to the determined display mode can be performed.

  Next, a specific example of pre-reading effect will be described. FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variation display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, and the two suspension displays are displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) in the combined suspension storage display unit. When start winning is done while being done, the aspect of pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display aspect, change timing) and the aspect of suggestion effect are decided, new pending indication is indicated according to the decision result . In the example shown in FIG. 72, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the first pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is the start winning prize (shift number 0) or shift Determined to be 1 time. Further, the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is not displayed in the special mode once, and the first display mode is displayed. It is displayed in the special mode or the second special mode. Also, the timing at which the hold indication is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode is the timing of the start winning or any shift timing. Therefore, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (B1), the timing of the start winning combination A third hold display is displayed on the hold storage display portion in the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). Also, when the change timing is determined at the start winning combination (the number of shifts is 0) and the final display mode is determined to the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (B2), the timing of the start winning combination The third storage display is displayed on the storage storage display portion in the second special mode (in this example, two “x” s are included in “o”).

  Also, even if the final display mode is the first special mode or the second special mode, the change timing is determined not to the start winning combination timing (the number of shifts 0) but to any shift timing (here, the number of shifts 1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (B3), the third hold display is displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) on the total hold storage display unit at the timing of the start winning. Then, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped (FIG. 72 (C)) and the variation display based on the suspension information corresponding to the first suspension display is started, the first suspension display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively.

  At this time, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the first effect mode, the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display is changed In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 72 (D1)).

  Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E1), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stuck on the new display in B3) is performed, and the suspension display in which the black arrow is stuck is the first special mode In this example, "x" is included in "o" and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E2), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is pierced is performed on the hold indication newly displayed in B3)), and the hold indication in which the black arrow is pierced is the second special mode In this example, two “x” s are included in “o” and displayed.

  In addition, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is determined to be the second effect mode, as the suggested effect that suggests that the display mode of the suspension display changes In the effect display device 9, display control is performed in which a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area (FIG. 72 (D2)).

  Then, when the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E3), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (indicated effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a white arrow is pierced is performed on the withhold indication newly displayed in B3)), and the hold indication in which the white arrow is pierced is the first special mode In this example, "x" is included in "o" and displayed. When the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 72 (E4), the second hold display of the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing (FIG. An effect (indicated effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) in which a white arrow is stabbed is performed on the suspension display newly displayed in B3)), and the suspension display in which the white arrow is stabbed is the second special mode In this example, two “x” s are included in “o” and displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, the display mode of the pending display is the first compared to the case of the first effect mode. The rate of becoming the second special aspect having a high expectation of becoming a big hit than the one special aspect is configured to be high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the first effect mode, that is, when the black arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the first special mode with low expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 72 (D1) to FIG. 72 (E1) is high. On the other hand, when the effect mode of the suggested effect (success pattern) is the second effect mode, that is, when the white arrow flies and is stuck in the hold display, the rate at which the hold display changes to the second special mode with high expectation is high. That is, the rate of transition from FIG. 72 (D2) to FIG. 72 (E4) is high. By being configured in this manner, even if the suggestion effect (success pattern) in which the arrow flies and sticks to the hold display makes it feel that it is desired to be performed in the second effect mode, and the suggestion effect is the first effect mode When a black arrow flies, it is possible to make the user feel that he / she wants you to pass without sticking to the hold display (I want a suggestion effect (pass pattern)).

  FIG. 73 and FIG. 74 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the effect display device 9, the variation display of the decorative symbol is being displayed, and the two suspension displays are displayed in the normal mode ("o" in this example) on the combined suspension storage display unit. When the start-up winning is performed while the game is being performed, the pre-reading effect (pre-reading effect pattern, final display mode, change timing) and the indication effect mode are determined, and a new hold display is displayed according to the determination result. In the example shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the pre-reading effect pattern is determined as the second pre-reading effect pattern, the final display mode is determined as the first special mode or the second special mode, and the change timing is 1 shift number or 2 shift number Decide. Also, the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

  In this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the hold display corresponding to the variable display (hold information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning, and at any shift timing. , And displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. Therefore, when the pre-reading effect pattern is determined to be the second pre-reading effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the third holding display is a special mode (this is a special mode (this In the example, six lines are drawn on the outside of "o".

  Then, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped (FIG. 73 (C)) and the variation display based on the suspension information corresponding to the first suspension display is started, the first suspension display is erased, and 2 The first and third pending displays are shifted respectively. At this time, if the effect mode of the suggested effect is determined to be the second effect mode, a white arrow flies from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes. (Second Effect Mode) Display control is performed (FIG. 73 (D)).

  Here, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 73 (E1), the combined hold storage display unit at the shift timing. While the second arrow display (corresponding to the hold display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)) is stuck to the white arrow (suggestion effect of the second game mode (success pattern)) is performed The hold display in which a white arrow is stuck is changed and displayed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o"). Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 1 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 73 (E2), at the shift timing, An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed in which a white arrow is stuck on the second hold display (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)). The display with the white arrow stuck is changed and displayed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  Further, when the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2, as shown in FIG. 73 (E3), a suggested effect (second effect mode in which the white arrow passes without sticking to any pending display at the shift timing) Suggested staging (passing pattern) is performed. In addition, the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 73 (E3) is performed when it is determined to execute the suggestion effect (passing pattern) in the second effect mode in the decorative symbol variation start process. As described above, in this embodiment, display control in which a black arrow (first effect mode) or a white arrow (second effect mode) is flung from the right side of the display area in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect This suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes, and when the arrow bites into the hold display (when the suggestion effect (success pattern) is made), the display mode changes, and the arrow marks any hold display If it passes without passing (if suggestion effect (passing pattern) is performed), the display mode does not change.

  After that, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped (FIG. 74 (F)) and the variation display based on the hold information corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first hold display is erased, and 2 The first pending display is shifted. At this time, a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area (first effect mode) display control is performed in the effect display device 9 as a suggested effect that suggests that the pending display changes (FIG. 74 (G) ).

  When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 74 (H1), at the shift timing, An effect (suggestive effect (success pattern) of the first effect mode) in which a black arrow is stabbed on the first pending display (corresponding to the pending display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)) is performed, The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the first special mode (in this example, "x" is included in "o") and displayed. When the change timing is determined to be the number of shifts 2 and the final display mode is determined to be the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 74 (H2), at the shift timing, An effect (suggested effect (success pattern) of the second effect mode) is performed in which a black arrow is stuck on the first hold display (corresponding to the suspension display of the special mode newly displayed in FIG. 73 (B3)). The hold display with a black arrow is changed from the special mode to the second special mode (in this example, two "x" s are included in "o").

  As shown in FIG. 72, in this embodiment, in the pre-reading effect based on the first pre-reading effect pattern, the on-hold display corresponding to the variable display (on-hold information) to be notified is temporarily displayed without being displayed in the special mode. , The first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode. At this time, the timing displayed in the final display mode includes an arbitrary shift timing in addition to the timing of the start winning. Further, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the pre-reading effect based on the second pre-reading effect pattern, the pending display corresponding to the variable display (pending information) to be notified is displayed in a special mode at the timing of the start winning. It is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode of the final display mode at any shift timing. As described above, in this embodiment, since it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, various timings can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. When the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the pending display may be displayed in the first special mode or the first special mode or the first special mode before the variable display based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display is started. (2) Since the game is changed to the special mode and displayed, the game entertainment can be improved.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 72 to 74, a case is shown in which an effect such as a black arrow flies from the right side of the display area is executed as a suggested effect, but such an effect mode of the suggested effect is such It is not limited to the form. For example, as the suggested effect, an effect using a movable member (feature) provided in the gaming machine may be performed. In this case, for example, the suggestion effect may be performed by displaying an image in which a bullet is fired according to the movement of the movable member imitating the shape of the pistol.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, microcomputer 560 for game control determines the display result and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display at the time of the start winning, which is realized by executing the effect processing at the time of winning, etc. Means for judging. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 is realized by executing the pre-reading effect determination process, the decorative symbol variation start process, etc., and the hold display corresponding to the hold storage based on the determination result by the determination means (total hold display The presentation execution means is provided to execute the pre-reading presentation to display the pending storage in the unit in the first special mode or the second special mode. Then, the effect executing means can change the hold display into the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings (timing of start winning, shift timing, etc.) and can display the hold display as a special mode. Control is performed to change and display the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode until the variable display based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display is started. It is configured to By being configured in this way, it is possible to change and display the hold display in the first special mode or the second special mode at a plurality of timings, so various display timings of the hold display can be changed. While changing the hold display from the special mode to the first special mode or the second special mode when the hold display can be displayed in a special mode, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. it can.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the display mode of the hold display, which is realized by executing the pre-reading effect determination process, the decorative symbol variation start process, etc. It is equipped with a suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect (indication effect (success pattern) and suggestion effect (pass pattern)) to suggest. Then, the suggestion effect execution means is configured to execute the suggestion effect at a higher frequency when the hold display is displayed in the special mode than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode. With such a configuration, when the hold display is displayed in a special mode, the suggestion effects are executed at a high frequency, so that the sense of expectation can be enhanced, and the game interest can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the effect determining means determines that the display result is a big hit by the determining means, the pending storage that is the determination target at a higher rate than when it is determined that the big hit does not occur. Display the corresponding hold indication in the second special mode. In addition, when effect presentation means performs pre-reading effect with the 2nd pre-reading effect pattern which changes and displays a suspension display from a special mode to a 1st special mode or a 2nd special mode, it does not display a suspension display in a special mode. The hold display is configured to be displayed in the second special mode at a higher rate than when performing the prefetching effect in the first preview effect pattern displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode. By being configured in this way, when the pending display is displayed in a special mode, the percentage displayed in the second special mode having a high expectation of becoming a big hit is increased, so that a sense of expectation can be enhanced. Game interest can be improved.

Third Embodiment
Further, in addition to the configuration shown in the first embodiment, in the low base state, the reserve storage stored when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state in the high base state is stored. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state in the stored high base state when the start winning is achieved in the second start winning opening 14 The special effect may be executable when the variable display based on the pending storage stored when being controlled is being performed. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in the case of such a configuration will be described.

  In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing start port switch passage processing in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75, in this embodiment, in the start port switch passage process, in addition to the process shown in the first embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits a second pending storage number addition designation command in step S1232. Then, when the gaming state is the high base state, control is performed to transmit the high base time second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when the gaming state is the low base state, the low base second start winning designation command is performed. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S1233).

  Note that the high base second start winning specification command is an effect control command indicating that the second start winning has occurred when the gaming state is the high base state. In addition, the low base second start winning specified command is an effect control command indicating that the second start winning has occurred when the gaming state is the low base state.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704) in the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S661 to S665 in addition to the process shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the received effect control command is the high base second start prize designation command (step S 661), the effect control CPU 101 executes effect execution information in the second start prize command storage area. As “0” (indicating that the special effect is not to be executed) is set (step S662).

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a start winning combination command storage area (first start winning combination command storage area, second start winning combination command storage area) according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable display of the identification information based on the retention memory stored in the hit base in the low base state (a transition is made when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol) is performed. Sometimes special effects are performed. As shown in FIG. 77, in this embodiment, a storage area for effect execution information is provided in the start-up winning command storage area, and information indicating whether or not special effects should be executed (conditions for executing special effects) Is stored in the start prize winning command storage area as "effect execution information".

  When the received effect control command is the low base second start prize specifying command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets “1” (special) as effect execution information in the second start win time command storage area. Shows that the effect is to be executed) (step S664). Further, when there is effect execution information for which “0” is set in the second start winning command storage area, the effect control CPU 101 changes them into “1” (step S655).

  In this embodiment, basically, when the variable display of the identification information based on the pending storage stored in the hit game is performed in the high base state, the special effect is not executed, but the process of step S655 is performed. By being executed, it is stored when the second starting winning combination occurs in the hit gaming state, when the holding storage stored when being controlled to the hit gaming state in the high base state is stored. Special effects are to be executed when variable display of identification information is performed based on the pending storage (the pending storage stored when being controlled to the hit gaming state in the high base state).

  In the second start winning command storage area, the effect control CPU 101 stores the storage area in the second start winning command storage area in which the variation category command is finally stored (that is, the area in which the latest received command is stored). Set the presentation execution information.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) according to the third embodiment. In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of steps S8002 to S8004 in addition to the process shown in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second symbol variation specification command reception flag (when the variation of the second special symbol is started) (step) S8002) It is checked whether "1" is set as effect execution information in the storage area (storage area 1) corresponding to the start fluctuation in the second start winning command storage area (step S8003). When “1” is set, the CPU for effect control 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen similar to the background screen according to the high probability / high base state (for example, red display It changes to the background screen of a color (step S8004), and execution of special rendering (in this example, background rendering) is started.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, in the special game state (in this example, the high base state), in the advantageous state (in the present example, the hit game state (the open state of the variable winning ball device 15)) The special effect is not performed when the variable display based on the pending storage stored while being controlled is being performed. Also, in the normal state (in this example, the low base state), when being controlled to the advantageous state in a state in which the pending storage stored when being controlled to the advantageous state in the special gaming state is stored When the game ball passes through the start area (in this example, the second start winning opening 14), the variable display based on the hold storage stored when being controlled to the advantageous state in the special gaming state stored is Special effects (in this example, background effects) are performed when being performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest rate for the game from being lowered because the frequency of executing the special effect is not sufficient.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit equipped with a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) Two substrates with two effect control substrates may be provided.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, as shown in FIG. (Sound / lamp substrate) having a function by the circuit mounted on the audio output substrate 70, a lamp driver substrate 35, etc., or a circuit mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35, etc. The effect control command may be transmitted, and may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the above, the control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the variation time and the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-series (effect of temporary stop and re-variation of one or more symbols being executed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation aspect, an example is shown in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the fluctuation is started, but the fluctuation pattern is produced by two or more commands. The control microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, when notified by two commands, before the game control microcomputer 560 reaches reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo reciprocation, presence or absence of slip rendition as the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and as the second command after reaching a reach (such as reach type or presence / absence of re-lottery effect) (when it does not reach, so-called A command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode) after the second stop may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. . When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after transmitting the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer) The second command may be sent (in the interrupt). Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission may be changed as appropriate. By notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the variation pattern command.

  Further, in the present specification, the “different proportions” are not limited to those having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. Also included are those with different proportions in a relationship such as B = 100%: 0% (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but according to the present invention, a plurality of types of medals are inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types according to the operation of the control lever by the player. Is applied to a slot machine where a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbol is turned according to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination. It is also possible.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses game media as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but a game machine The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine which seals game media such as balls and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start winning opening 15 variable winning ball device 20 special variable winning ball device 31 game control board ( Main board)
56 CPU
80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Holding storage means capable of storing information on variable display as holding storage;
Hold display means for displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means;
Determining means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state;
And determination means for determining whether or not control is performed in the advantageous state before the determination of the determination means.
The display mode of the hold display includes a normal mode, a special mode, and a special mode,
An effect executing means capable of executing an on-hold notice effect for displaying the on-hold display in a special mode according to the judgment result of the judging means;
The information processing apparatus further comprising: a suggestion effect execution means for performing a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the pending display changes.
The suggestion effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a first indication effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes after the effect and a second indication effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change after the effect,
The indication effect can be performed when the pending display is displayed in the special mode and not displayed in the special mode,
When the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the second suggestion effect is executed at a higher frequency than when the hold display is not displayed in the special mode,
According to the judgment result of the judgment means, further provided is a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect.
The preliminary rendering effect execution means can execute the preliminary rendering at different rates depending on whether the variable display to be determined is controlled to the advantageous state or the type of the advantageous state to be controlled. A game machine characterized by